JP7475967B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

There is known a gaming machine that can display an amount display indicating the amount of gaming value granted when the player is in an advantageous state, and a notification display notifying the player that the amount of gaming value granted has reached a predetermined amount (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-17403 A

For various displays, such as the amount of prize awarded and notifications, gaming machines use specific characters that form specific areas surrounded by lines forming the characters. In addition, gaming machines display background images that correspond to various states, such as advantageous states. There is room for improvement in the relationship between such specific characters and background images.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can optimally display a display including specific characters in relation to a background image.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player ,
a display means having a display area capable of displaying an image, the display area capable of displaying a display image of game-related information relating to the progress of a game;
a storage means capable of storing image data including at least a specific image to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means having a plurality of display layers on which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image for displaying each of the images arranged on the plurality of display layers in the display area;
a variable winning means capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can easily win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot or cannot hardly win a prize;
A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state;
a launching means capable of launching game media in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means for displaying a guidance message to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area out of the first area and the second area;
The display means includes:
A specific display corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed,
A display of an amount of the game value to be awarded can be displayed on the front side of the specific display,
A first notification display is displayed on the front side of the specific display when the amount of the game value awarded reaches a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display is displayed when the amount of the game value awarded reaches a second predetermined amount.
The notification display is a display that ends after a specific period of time has elapsed since the display was started,
The character display included in the notification display has a display size larger than that of the character display used to display the amount of the provided toner.
The character display included in the provision amount display and the notification display includes a specific character display in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the character display,
The specific character display used for the application amount display is not visible from the specific area,
The display means includes:
When the round of play is being played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the second state to the first state;
When the game medium does not win the variable prize-winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value has not been awarded can be displayed as the award amount display;
When the game medium wins the variable prize-winning means within the predetermined period, a count-up display corresponding to the award of the game value is performed at the start of the award amount display, and then a special display different from the predetermined display is displayed ;
the guidance display means is capable of displaying the guidance display in a first manner before the predetermined period has elapsed, and is capable of displaying the guidance display in a second manner having a different degree of emphasis from the first manner after the predetermined period has elapsed,
The image processing means is capable of generating the specific image on a specific display layer,
The display image of the game-related information is generated on a special display layer that is displayed in the display area with priority over the specific display layer.
It is characterized by:
Further, the gaming machine of the means 1 is a gaming machine capable of displaying images (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), has a display area capable of displaying images, and is capable of displaying display images (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J) of game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols, and small symbols having a smaller display area than the decorative symbols) in the display area (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), a storage means (for example, the CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative symbol or a background image) to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information, and a storage means capable of arranging images based on the image data. The display device 5 includes an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) having a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., shown in FIG. 16-5), capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers, and a performance execution means (e.g., a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display during performance process shown in FIG. 16-17) capable of executing a performance to display the specific image in the display area, and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area which is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (e.g., the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH61). and a second display area 20SH52 which is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to a jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and is capable of displaying an amount of awarded game value related to the amount of the awarded game value in front of the background image in the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an acquired number display 20SHK related to the number of awarded prize balls in front of the background image in the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and As notification displays that notify that the amount of game value awarded has reached a predetermined amount, the image display device 5 can display a first notification display that notifies that the amount of game value awarded has reached a first predetermined amount and a second notification display that notifies that the amount of game value awarded has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display region 20SH51, on the front side of the background image, as an acquired number notification display 20SHKH that notifies that the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot game state has reached a "round number", an acquired number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls", and an acquired number notification display of "over 2000" when the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls"). and the like), the award amount display is updated each time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquisition number display 20SHK is updated each time a gaming ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot gaming state, etc.), the notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the start of display (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of display, etc.), the characters used in the notification display are larger in size than the characters used in the award amount display (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.), and the characters used in the award amount display and the notification display are within a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. the specific characters used for the acquisition amount display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines is formed (e.g., the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed), the specific characters used for the award amount display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (e.g., the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area), the specific characters used for the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (e.g., the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are such that the background image is visible from the specific area), and the storage means changes the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area to a first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, the image processing means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the specific image arranged on a specific display layer based on the image data from the central part of the display area of the image display device 5 to a second position different from the first position (for example, in the case of feature part 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205), and the image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on a specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-23, a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to generate a displacement target image, and an image for displacement is applied to the displacement target image to generate a display image displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance). a portion that creates an image in which the images in the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R move upward and the image in the middle region 006SG005C moves downward), the effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in feature portion 006SG) that displays the displacing specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display, and the display image of the game-related information is placed on a special display layer in which an image placed thereon is displayed preferentially in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-26, a first interface image 006SG005I and a second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in a layer 1 image drawing area which has the highest image display priority).

With this configuration, the display including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image. Furthermore, a displaced specific image in which at least a portion of the specific image displayed in a specified performance is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific performance, so that the specific performance can be executed with a smaller amount of data compared to when the image data of these displaced specific images are stored exclusively. Furthermore, when the specific performance is executed, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the specific image, which would result in a decrease in visibility of the display image of the game-related information.

In addition, the form for implementing the invention described below includes the invention related to the gaming machine of Means 2 below. Conventionally, there have been gaming machines capable of executing an effect (specific effect) in which an image displayed on an image display device (display means) breaks and scatters at a specific timing, such as during a reach effect during variable display, as shown in JP 2019-141396 A. However, in such gaming machines, the effect is simply that the image breaks and scatters, so it is conceivable to improve the interest of the effect by executing the effect while other images are displayed on the image display device. In this case, however, there is a problem that dedicated image data must be created for each image displayed on the image display device in order to execute the effect, and there is a risk that the amount of data stored in the storage means may become excessively large. In view of this, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can reduce the amount of data stored in the storage means in order to execute a specific effect.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine), and has a display area capable of displaying images, and includes a display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying display images (e.g., a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of game-related information relating to the progress of a game (e.g., the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, and a small symbol having a smaller display area than a decorative symbol) in the display area, a storage means (e.g., a CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (e.g., a decorative symbol or a background image) to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information, and a plurality of display layers (e.g., a display layer 206) capable of arranging images based on the image data. For example, the display device 100 includes an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 16-5), and a performance execution means (e.g., a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 16-17) capable of executing a performance to display the specific image in the display area, and the storage means stores a display position in the display area of at least a part of the specific image from a first position (e.g., in the case of the characteristic unit 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position (e.g., The feature portion 006SG is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-23, a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image is applied to the displacement target image to generate a left region 006SG005L and a right region 006SG005L as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance). the image in the middle area 006SG005C moves downwards), the effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in feature part 006SG) that displays the displacing specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display, and the display image of the game-related information is placed on a special display layer in which an image placed thereon is displayed preferentially in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-26, a first interface image 006SG005I and a second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area which has the highest image display priority).
According to this feature, a displaced specific image in which at least a part of a specific image displayed in a predetermined performance is displaced can be generated from image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in the specific performance, so that the specific performance can be executed with a smaller amount of data compared to a case in which image data of the displaced specific image is stored exclusively. Also, when the specific performance is executed, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced in accordance with the displacement of the specific image, which would result in a decrease in visibility of the display image of the game-related information.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of lighting of a game effect lamp. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of processing during a jackpot opening. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes. This is a timing chart showing the timing of the opening of the large prize opening and the timing of various displays. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of a state in which a game ball is caught in a special variable winning ball device. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. This is a timing chart showing the timing of the opening of the large prize opening and the timing of various displays. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display. A figure showing background art related to a first form of the characteristic portion 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions, etc. in the first form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing how the acquisition number display appears in the first form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation of the acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions in the second form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing a modified example 1 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions in the second form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing a modified example 2 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions in the second form of the feature portion 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the result in the third form of the feature portion 20SH. A figure showing an example of the presentation period of various presentations in a jackpot gaming state in the third form of the feature unit 20SH. A figure showing examples of the presentation operation of various presentations in a jackpot gaming state in the third form of the feature unit 20SH. A figure showing an example of a setting suggestion provided by an ending background image in the third form of feature section 20SH. A figure showing background art related to the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times in the fourth form of characteristic portion 20SH. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times in the fourth form of characteristic portion 20SH. A figure showing how the remaining number of times display appears in the fourth form of characteristic part 20SH. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH. FIG. A figure showing an example of the remaining number of times display and remaining number of times notification display presentation operation in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH. A figure showing an example of a presentation action when a winning occurs during a round in feature portion 19SH. A figure showing an example of the positional relationship between multiple display layers in which various displays are displayed in a characteristic portion 19SH. A figure showing an example of a presentation operation when an over-winning occurs in feature portion 19SH. A figure showing an example of the positional relationship between multiple display layers in which various displays are displayed in a characteristic portion 19SH. A figure showing an example of a setting suggestion by the over winning effect in feature section 19SH. This figure shows an example of a presentation operation when there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls are not won in characteristic section 19SH and a round in which an over-winning ball occurs. A figure showing another example of the presentation action when there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls are not won and a round in which an over-winning ball occurs in the characteristic portion 19SH. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in a performance control board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a layer configuration. 11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams of generation of a displacement image when a displacement image is applied to a displacement target image; 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of application of a displacement image to a displacement target image; FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a VRAM. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a display image processing process. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a generated image and an area that can be displayed on an image display device. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the display mode of the decorative pattern in the normal state, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the display mode of the decorative pattern in the time-saving state. A diagram showing the presentation form of the development suggestion presentation. A diagram showing the presentation form of the development suggestion presentation. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in the development suggestion performance. A figure showing the presentation form of a reach suggestion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of a reach suggestion presentation in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in a reach suggestion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the revival presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the revival presentation in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a revival performance in a modified example. A figure showing the determination ratio of the display color of a crack effect image in a revival performance in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation format of the pre-reading preview presentation in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in a preview performance in a modified example. A figure showing the determination ratio of the display color of the cutting effect image in the pre-reading preview performance in a modified example. A figure showing the change pattern of the display color of the cutting effect image in the pre-reading preview performance in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation format of the promotion presentation in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a promotion effect in a modified example. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an image generated in a modified example and an area that can be displayed on an image display device. FIG. A figure showing the presentation format of the promotion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation format of the promotion presentation in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form of the temporary stop suggestion presentation in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form of the temporary stop suggestion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the temporary stop notification presentation in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in the temporary stop suggestion performance and temporary stop notification in a modified example. 13A and 13B are explanatory diagrams of display of a stereoscopic image in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form of the variable display preview presentation and development suggestion presentation in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a modified example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the playboard 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. As shown in the figure, the frame lamps 9b include a lower left lamp 9bL1 in the lower left part, an upper left lamp 9bL2 in the upper left part, a lower right lamp 9bR1 in the lower right part, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 in the upper right part. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2. In addition, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided in the speakers 8L and 8R parts corresponding to each other. A display device lower lamp 9f is provided below the image display device 5 on the gaming board 2, and the display device lower lamp 9f includes a left display device lower lamp 9fL and a right display device lower lamp 9fR as shown in the figure. In addition, lamps 9g near the general winning openings are provided near the three general winning openings 10 located at the lower left of the game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided. The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, the lamp below the display device 9f, and the lamp near the general winning opening 9g may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, the lamp below the display device 9f, and the lamp near the general winning opening 9g are each composed of an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get prize balls by making the game ball enter the large prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot game state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot game state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the jackpot game state, a so-called right hit is performed, in which the game ball is shot into the right-side game area so that the game ball enters the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, the operation of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state where probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes depending on each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The gameplay may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of the probability of the jackpot state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability loop type); when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, and the gameplay state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to the probability of the jackpot state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V probability of the jackpot type); and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot is 1/320, the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the gameplay state is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the high base (during time-saving control) (so-called type 1/2 mixed type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but a setting may be set in which the probability of a big win or small win is higher than when the setting value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a big win game is smaller (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the gameplay is changed according to the setting value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as a performance switch (a switch for executing a predetermined performance each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability variable state or a big win game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line, etc., by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 10-1 to 10-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment starts displaying the number of winning balls after a predetermined period in which the attacker is opened in the first round of play, and if the attacker is not won within the predetermined period, a predetermined display is made to indicate that the number of winning balls has not increased, and if the attacker is won within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is made. Below, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042AK having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those explained in the basic explanation above will be omitted.

Figure 10-1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, and shows an example of the lighting when all of the game effect lamps 9, such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left display device lower lamp 9fL, right display device lower lamp 9fR), and general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, are lit. In the feature part 042AK of this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, the game effect lamps 9, such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display bottom lamp 9f (left display bottom lamp 9fL, right display bottom lamp 9fR), and general winning hole vicinity lamp 9g, are lit in sequence from the lower left to the lower right, suggesting to the player that he should hit to the right.

Figure 10-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in Figure 10-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is on or not (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), a jackpot start presentation waiting time is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042AKS002, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the jackpot start presentation waiting time may be set in a game control process timer provided in RAM 102.

Following the processing of step 042AKS002, settings are made to send the winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS003). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS003, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the winning start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the winning start designation command may be stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. After that, the big win flag is cleared to the off state (step 042AKS004). Also, settings are made to end the probability change state or the time-saving state (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, a process of clearing the probability change flag or the time-saving flag to the off state, a process of clearing the special chart change count counter for counting the number of times the special chart game is executed in the probability change state or the time-saving state, etc. may be executed. Then, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4", which corresponds to the pre-opening process of the large prize opening (step 042AKS006), and the special pattern stop process is terminated.

If the big win flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on or not (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small win flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), the waiting time for the small win start presentation is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS008, a timer initial value that is predetermined corresponding to the waiting time for the small win start presentation may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the processing of step 042AKS008, similar to the processing of step 042AKS003, settings are made to send a win start designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS009). After that, the small win flag is cleared to the off state (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "8", which is the value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step 042AKS011).

Also, if the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern (step 042AKS012). After executing either the processing of step 042AKS011 or step 042AKS012, a judgment is made as to whether or not to end the special pattern state or the time-saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS003, the value of the special pattern change count counter (special pattern change count value) is updated, for example, by subtracting or adding 1, and a judgment is made as to whether or not the updated special pattern change count value matches a predetermined special game state end judgment value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end judgment value, the special pattern state or the time-saving state may be ended and controlled to the normal state by clearing the special pattern state flag or the time-saving flag to the off state, etc. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end judgment value, the state of the special game state flag or time-saving flag is maintained, and the processing of step 042AKS013 is terminated. After such a judgment of the end of the special game state or time-saving state is executed, the special symbol stop processing is terminated. The end judgment based on the special symbol change count value may be performed only when the time-saving state is in effect, and the special game state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot." Alternatively, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for judging the end of the special game state may be extracted from a random counter provided in RAM 102, and a judgment of whether or not to end the special game state may be made by referring to a table for deciding the end of the special game state previously stored in ROM 101 or the like.

Figure 10-3 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S114 of Figure 6 as a jackpot opening pre-processing. In the jackpot opening pre-processing shown in Figure 10-3, the CPU 103 first judges whether the jackpot start flag is on or not (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start flag is set to the on state in response to the jackpot flag being on in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in Figure 6. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is judged whether the jackpot start performance is waiting (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in Figure 3, when the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", a timer initial value previously determined corresponding to the jackpot start performance waiting time is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the processing of step S312, if the game control process timer value does not match a predetermined waiting time elapsed judgment value (such as "0"), it is determined that the jackpot start presentation is currently waiting, and if it does match, it is determined that the jackpot start presentation is not currently waiting.

If the jackpot start time performance is on standby in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; Yes), the game control process timer value is updated, for example by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), and the jackpot opening pre-processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the jackpot start time performance is not on standby in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start time flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), the large prize opening number counter is cleared (step 042AKS025), the jackpot type buffer value stored in RAM 102 is read (step 042AKS026), and the opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is set. In the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, a common opening control pattern is set regardless of the type of jackpot, but for example, if there is a "sudden" jackpot type, it may be set to a different opening control pattern than the "probable" or "non-probable" jackpot types. Also, even if the jackpot type is "probable" or "non-probable", it may be set to a different opening control pattern depending on the jackpot type, for example, different opening control patterns may be set for the "probable" and "non-probable" jackpot types.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the game is waiting to open the big prize opening in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next opening wait end judgment value, and if they do not match, it is determined that the game is waiting for the next opening, while if they match, it is determined that the game is not waiting for the next opening. If the game is waiting for the next opening in step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), proceed to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. Note that the game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the big prize in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. 10-2, or the time set as the interval time between each round in the post-big prize opening process in step S116 in FIG. 6.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the machine is not waiting for the next opening (step 042AKS027; No), the machine performs settings to open the large prize opening in accordance with the set opening control pattern and the count value in the large prize opening number counter (step 042AKS028). As an example, in the processing of step 042AKS028, a timer initial value determined in advance in accordance with the large prize opening opening time is set in the game control process timer, and the large prize opening opening time, which is the upper limit of the time for which the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state, is set. In addition, the solenoid drive signal for a specified large prize opening door solenoid is started to be output via a specified solenoid circuit, and the large prize opening door solenoid is set to the ON state to open the large prize opening.

At this time, for example, regardless of whether the count value of the special prize opening counter is between "1" and "15," the timer initial value corresponding to a special prize opening opening time of 29.5 seconds is set in the game control process timer.

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a command to specify that the large prize opening is in progress to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the processing of step 042AKS029, the large prize opening count value is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the processing during the large prize opening (step 042AKS031), and the processing before the large prize opening is terminated.

Figure 10-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S115 of Figure 6 as the jackpot opening processing. In the jackpot opening processing shown in Figure 10-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the jackpot opening (step 042AKS041), for example, by determining whether the count switch 23 has been turned on. If no game ball has entered the jackpot opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if a game ball enters the large prize opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 updates the winning number count value by adding 1, and sets the main board 11 to send a winning designation command indicating that the game ball has entered the large prize opening to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value is not a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; No), the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS044), and then judges whether 29.5 seconds have passed since the large prize opening was opened, depending on whether the game control process timer value matches the timer value corresponding to 29.5 seconds, for example (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not passed (step 042AKS045; No), the process of opening the large prize slot ends.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated winning number count value has reached a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if it is determined in step 042AKS045 that 29.5 seconds have passed since the large prize opening was opened (step 042AKS043; Yes), the solenoid for the large prize opening door to close the large prize opening is set to an off state (step 042AKS046), for example by stopping the output of a solenoid drive signal to a specified large prize opening door solenoid via a specified solenoid circuit, and the winning number count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the processing of step 042AKS047, settings are made to send a command to the performance control board 12 to specify the process to be performed after the large prize opening (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", which corresponds to the process to be performed after the large prize opening (step 042AKS049), and the process during the large prize opening is terminated.

In this way, the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the pre-jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-3, the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-4 (including post-jackpot opening process and jackpot end process) are executed, and various performance control commands such as a win start command, a large prize opening open command, a prize winning command, and a large prize opening open command are set for transmission. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. 5 is executed, and the set performance control commands are transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12, so that the performance control board 12 is aware of each timing such as the start of the jackpot, the opening (start of a round) and closing (end of a round) of the large prize opening, the winning of a prize in the large prize opening, and the end of the jackpot.

Figure 10-5 is a flow chart showing an example of various display processes performed in the jackpot performance process of step S176 in Figure 9. In the various display processes shown in Figure 10-5, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a jackpot end command has been received (step 042AKS051). The jackpot end command is a command sent from the main board 11 when it is determined in the jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 in Figure 6 that the number of rounds in which the jackpot opening is open has reached the set upper limit number of times, and is a command to end the jackpot performance and execute the ending performance.

If it is determined that the winning end designation command has not been received (step 042AKS051; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nth round (nth round predetermined period has elapsed) (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and with an initial value of "1", it is incremented by one in the processing of step 042AKS066 described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, and is set as a timer value when the round play starts, and when the timer value becomes "0", it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nth round. More specifically, in response to the large prize winning port being completely opened (detection that the large prize winning port door has moved to a position where it is completely open), a large prize winning port open designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side, and the timer value starts counting for the predetermined period from the timing when the command is received.

In the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, as described later, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the first round of round play, the winning number display, which is a display of the number of balls won, and the round display, which shows the number of rounds, are performed. On the side of the performance control board 12, during the period from the start of the big win to the end of the game (the period from the fanfare to the ending), the process of adding 15 to the winning number is continuously performed each time a winning designation command indicating that a game ball has entered the big winning port is received. On the side of the performance control board 12, when the winning designation command is received, a series of processes must be performed, which are to first analyze the command, add the winning number, and display the added winning number, and a predetermined period is required from the winning to the display. Therefore, if the predetermined period is made too short, the series of processes may not be completed in time for the winning of the first round of round play until the predetermined period has elapsed, and the winning number display may display "0000", and the process of displaying "0015" may not be able to keep up even though the winning has occurred ("0000" is displayed and then "0015" is displayed, which gives the player a sense of incongruity). Therefore, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds is set, and if a game ball present at the top of the large prize winning port at the time of opening wins a prize from the opening to the display of the round number, a period is secured in which "0000" is not displayed as the winning number display, but "0015" is displayed directly. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval in the case of continuous firing, and even if the period from firing to winning the large prize winning port is taken into consideration, the time interval required for the game balls fired continuously to win the large prize winning port is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of balls that win the large prize winning port from the time the large prize winning port is opened until the winning number display is performed is one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of winnings before the winning number display or the round number display is increased, which increases the winning number display at the time the round number display starts, giving the player a sense of discomfort. In addition, in the present embodiment, the predetermined period in the characteristic part 042AK is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, but the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

If it is determined that a predetermined period of time has not elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, i.e., whether it is the first round (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As described above, the initial value is "1", and is sequentially incremented by 1 in the processing of step 042AKS066, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. In the processing of step 042AKS053, the value of n is checked to determine whether n=1.

If it is determined that n = 1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 performs a right-hit presentation that suggests to the player that he should hit the right, and controls the operation of a fanfare presentation that suggests that the jackpot game state has been reached (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, if it is determined that n ≠ 1 (step 042AKS053; No), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the round number corresponding to the n-1R and the number of wins, and controls the operation of the jackpot presentation for that n-1R (step 042AKS055). In the processing of step 042AKS055, for example, if n = 2, the round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of wins are displayed, and the operation of the jackpot presentation corresponding to the first round is controlled. In the processing of step 042AKS055, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a jackpot performance, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot performance, and predetermined music or sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The illumination pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be preset.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a winning designation command has been received, i.e., whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning port (step 042AKS056). Note that the processing of step 042AKS056 judges whether or not a winning has occurred from the start of the nth round up to a predetermined period of time. If a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the presentation control CPU 120 simply ends the various display processes.

When a winning command is received, that is, when a winning is entered into the big winning port within a predetermined period from the start of the nth round (step 042AKS056; Yes), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance adds "15" to the count value of the number of winning balls (step 042AKS057). The count value of the number of winning balls is pre-stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the initial value set to "0", and is added by the processing of step 042AKS057 and the processing of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of winning balls is counted continuously during the so-called consecutive wins, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time-saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the timing when the consecutive wins end. After executing the processing of step 042AKS057, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance lights up the attacca lamp 9c and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). In addition, the illumination of the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (similar to step 042AKS064) is performed in a manner (a manner in which a winning is notified) that is greater than the number of illuminations per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that is illuminated during the performance during a big win. Therefore, it is easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the illumination of the attacca lamp 9c may also be performed in a manner that the number of illuminations per unit time during the winning hole is greater than that during the performance during a big win. In addition, when the game ball enters the big winning hole, the attacca lamp 9c is illuminated and a winning sound is output regardless of whether the winning occurs within a predetermined period. Therefore, it is easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and interest in the game can be improved.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS058, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether n=1, i.e., whether it is the first round (1R), as in step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059). If n=1, i.e., if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are terminated. On the other hand, if n≠1, i.e., if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of balls won added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of balls won is displayed), the number of balls won is updated and displayed (step 042AKS060), and the various display processes are terminated. In addition, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, when updating the number of balls won in the process of step 042AKS060, the count value of the number of balls won added in step 042AKS057 is not displayed as is, but rather a count-up display (announcement display of an increase in the number of balls won) is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23) before the number of balls won is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the number of balls won is increasing, which can increase the interest in the game.

If it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 10-5 that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds and the number of wins corresponding to the nth round, and controls the operation of the presentation during the jackpot of that nth round (step 042AKS061). If n=1, i.e., if it is the first round, the number of rounds and the number of wins are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of wins is updated and displayed in step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball enters the big winning hole before the predetermined period has elapsed, the winning number is added by "15" in step 042AKS057, so in step 042AKS061, a count-up display (announcement display of the increase in the winning number) is performed as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), and then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), a winning number display (as a specific display) different from the predetermined display indicating that the winning number has not increased in the current big win (display of "0015") is performed (if the game is in a consecutive win, a display in which "15" is added to the winning number at the previous big win may be performed after the count-up). On the other hand, if a game ball has not entered the big winning hole before the predetermined period has elapsed, the winning number remains "0" and the winning number has not increased in the current big win, so a winning number display (display of "0000") indicating that the winning number has not increased is performed as a predetermined display as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-22) (if the game is in a consecutive win, a display of the winning number at the previous big win may be performed). In addition, the acquisition number display (predetermined display) indicating that the acquisition number has not increased may be "0000", or may be displayed as a number other than numbers, such as "---" or "not increased". In addition, in step 042AKS061, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a big win performance, and the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the big win performance, and a predetermined music or sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The illumination pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the big win performance may be set in advance. In this way, during a predetermined period after the big win opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the acquisition number display is not performed, only the attacca lamp 9c is illuminated when the game ball enters the big win opening, but in a situation where the acquisition number display is performed after the predetermined period has elapsed, the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately illuminated, and the performance effect lamp 9 is illuminated more than during the predetermined period. Therefore, if a prize is won within a specified period, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy, and the presentation after the number of prizes won after the specified period is displayed can be made more exciting, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Also, since the presentation effect lamp 9 is illuminated at the same timing as the performance during a jackpot, the presentation can be made more exciting at the same time as the performance during a jackpot is executed, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a winning command has been received, i.e., whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning opening (step 042AKS062). If a winning command has been received, i.e., if a winning has occurred in the large winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS063), lights up the Attacker Trump 9c, outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning, and performs a count-up display (notification display of an increase in the number of winnings) and then performs a winning number update display that displays the number of winnings (step 042AKS064).

After executing the processing of step 042AKS064, or if the winning designation command has not been received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the next round after the nth round, the nth+1th round, has started (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, for example, it may be judged by whether the large prize opening designation command indicating the start of the nth+1th round has been received from the main board 11. If the nth+1th round has not started, that is, if the large prize opening designation command has not been received and it remains in the nth round (step 042AKS065; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends various display processes as they are. On the other hand, when the n+1R has started, that is, when a command indicating the start of the n+1R has been received (step 042AKS065; Yes), n is incremented by "1" (step 042AKS066) and various display processes are terminated. For example, when n=1, that is, the first round, n=2 in step 042AKS066. Note that even though n=2 and it is the second round, until a predetermined period has elapsed, steps 042AKS052 and 053 are judged as No, and in step 042AKS055, a round display corresponding to the first round, which is the n-1R, is performed, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (after step 042AKS052 is judged as Yes, it is displayed in the processing of step 042AKS061).

If it is determined in step 042AKS051 that a win end command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the end of the jackpot presentation corresponding to the round in order to perform an ending presentation (step 042AKS067), clears n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and ends various display processes.

Next, the display timing and presentation operation examples of the round number display and the number of wins display will be specifically explained with reference to Figs. 10-6 to 10-14. Note that the illustrated example shows the case of the so-called first win (first big win), not during a consecutive win.

Figure 10-6 is a timing chart showing the timing of opening the big prize opening and the timing of various displays. Figures 10-7 to 10-14 are diagrams showing examples of the performance operation display on the image display device 5, the open/closed state of the big prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. As shown in Figures 10-6 and 10-7 (a-1), when the combination of decorative patterns that constitute a big prize is displayed in a stopped state, the big prize game state is entered. At this stage, as shown in Figure 10-7 (b-1), the big prize opening is closed. In addition, in order to inform the player that a big prize has been won, various performance effect lamps 9 such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are lit as shown in Figure 10-7 (c-1). In the illustrated example, the upper row is a performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower row is a performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming board 2.

When a jackpot is hit, as shown in FIG. 10-6, a right-hit effect and a fanfare effect are performed to inform the player that he or she should hit the right until the end of the specified period of the first round (step 042AKS054 in FIG. 10-5). Note that the period from the jackpot to the start of the first round shown in FIG. 10-6 is sufficiently longer than the specified period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 10-7(c-2), all the effect lamps 9 are turned off. Then, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in the order of the lower left, upper left, center, upper right, and lower right, and a right-hit effect is performed in which "right hit" is displayed in large on the image display device. Note that the small right-hit display displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2) may be displayed continuously during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-hit performance, as shown in Fig. 10-7 (a-3) to Fig. 10-10 (a-19), the image display device 5 continues to display "right hit" superimposed on the fanfare image. Therefore, the following will explain the order in which the performance effect lamps 9 light up. When the right-hit performance starts, as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-3), the general winning entrance vicinity lamp 9g located at the lower left of the play area lights up first, and then as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left part, lights up. Next, as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-5), the left display device lower lamp 9fL of the display device lower lamps 9f located at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the play board 2 lights up, and then as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left part, lights up, and as shown in Fig. 10-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp 9eL corresponding to the speaker 8L part lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 light up in order from the lower left to the upper left of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 10-8(b-7), the large prize opening is closed, so the launched game medium will not enter the large prize opening at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 10-8(b-7) shows the launched game ball passing through the second path above the large prize opening door and being guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 located in the upper center of the game board 2 lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-9), the main lamp 9 located above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3 lights up, causing the performance effect lamp 9 located in the upper center of the pachinko game machine 1 to light up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R portion lights up, and then, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-11), the upper right lamp 9bR2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper right portion, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-12), the right display device lower lamp 9fR, which is one of the display device lower lamps 9f provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the game board 2, lights up. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right portion, lights up, and the attacca lamp 9c provided at the position near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 light up in sequence from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko game machine 1. As a result, the performance effect lamps 9 light up in sequence from the lower left side to the upper left side, then the center portion, then the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko game machine 1, and a right-hit performance is performed in the performance effect lamp 9 that suggests to the player to hit right. In this example, both the performance effect lamp 9 on the gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 on the game board 2 are used to suggest a right hit, but either one may be used. Also, both may be lit independently, simultaneously or with a time lag, such as lighting only the performance effect lamp 9 on the gaming machine frame 3 from the lower left to the center and then to the lower right, and lighting only the performance effect lamp 9 on the game board 2 from the lower left to the center and then to the lower right.

After the right-hit effect on the effect effect lamps 9 has ended, all effect effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (a-15), the right-hit display on the image display device 5 continues (the right-hit effect itself is being executed).

Next, when the timing for opening the large prize opening comes as shown in FIG. 10-6, the first round starts, and the large prize opening is opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16). At this stage, the right-hit display on the image display device 5 continues as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-16), and all the performance effect lamps 9 remain off as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-16) until a predetermined period has elapsed (similar to FIG. 10-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all the performance effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any of the indicators such as luminosity, brightness, and illuminance may be lower than normal. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16), even after the large prize opening is opened, the performance effect lamps 9 may be sequentially lit as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to FIG. 10-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period has elapsed to suggest a right hit. In this case, the lighting speed of each effect lamp may be faster than before the large prize opening is opened (the lighting period may be shortened and the transition speed may be faster). Also, if the effect lamps 9 are lit in sequence after the large prize opening is opened to suggest a right hit, after the last to light up, the attacca lamp 9c, is lit, it may be left lit as is, instead of being turned off, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). This makes it possible to make the player aware that the large prize opening has been opened.

When the large prize opening is completely opened as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-17), a count of 0.6 seconds is started as a predetermined period corresponding to the first round, and when the game ball enters the large prize opening as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. Note that even if a game ball (a game ball that has been hit quickly) is launched by a right-hit performance before the first round starts (before the large prize opening is opened), it can still win within the predetermined period corresponding to the first round if it is located above the large prize opening at the time the large prize opening is opened. On the side of the performance control board 12, the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5 outputs a winning sound as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), and the attacca lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify the player that a prize has been won as shown in FIG. 10-10(c-18). As described above, the attacca lamp 9c emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times per unit time that the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c emit light during the performance during a big win. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), the launched game ball passes through the first path, which is the path toward the big winning hole, and is guided to the winning path in which the count switch 23 is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present in the big winning hole door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is less than 0.6 seconds, which is a predetermined period. This increases the likelihood that a game ball present above the large prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

After the game ball enters the big prize slot as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), or after time has passed since the state shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17) without a prize being won, and a predetermined period of time has passed as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-19), (b-19) and (c-19), as shown in FIG. 10-6, it is time to display the number of rounds corresponding to the first round and the big prize performance, and also to display the number of prizes won, so the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), if the game ball enters the big prize hole before the specified period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), the round number "1R" is displayed to indicate that it is the first round, and a count-up display is also displayed. At the same time as these displays, as a big win performance (first round performance), as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), the display of the decorative symbols that constitute the big win, the display of "BOUNUS", and characters are displayed. Note that the decorative symbols that constitute the big win and the display of "BOUNUS" that are displayed as the big win performance (first round performance) are not shown (the same applies to FIG. 10-20 described later), but are displayed in a manner that suggests that the player should hit to the right, as shown in FIG. 10-21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or right-hit effect is performed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the opening of the big prize opening, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-2), the "7" decorative symbol constituting the big win is displayed facing forward, and a star-shaped image is displayed above the "B" in the "BOUNUS" display, as a big win effect. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-3), the "7" decorative symbol constituting the big win is tilted toward the back right, and a star-shaped image is moved to the top of the "O" in the "BOUNUS" display. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-4), the "7" decorative symbol constituting the big win faces forward, and a star-shaped image is moved to the top of the "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-5), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot, tilts toward the left rear, and a star-shaped image moves to the top of the "U" in the "BOUNUS" display. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-6), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot, faces forward again, and a star-shaped image moves to the top of the "S" in the "BOUNUS" display, and the display returns to FIG. 10-21 (A-2). In this way, in the jackpot performance, the decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot is moved toward the right rear, the front, and the left rear, and the star-shaped image is moved from the left character in the "BOUNUS" display to the right, suggesting to the player that he should hit to the right. The display of the movement of the decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot and the shifting display of the star-shaped image are called effect displays, and effect displays also include, for example, a clockwise rotation of a specified image and a character gradually turning to the right. In other words, the effect display should be displayed in a manner that suggests a right hit. In this way, the effect display suggests that a right hit should be made, making it easier to recognize a right hit.

In the big win performance, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset lighting pattern according to the big win performance. In this example, it is assumed that a lighting pattern is set to alternately light up the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming board 2. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the winning number display. In this way, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the performance effect lamp 9 does not light up until the big win opening is opened and a predetermined period has passed, and as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up after the winning number display after the predetermined period has passed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from quickly firing and to promote the timing of firing.

On the other hand, if a certain period of time has passed without the game ball entering the big prize slot, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-22), the count-up display is not performed and "0000" is displayed as the number of wins. Note that the following are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won: the round number display "1R" is displayed to indicate one round, the decorative symbols that make up the big prize are displayed as a big prize performance (first round performance), "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, and a character is displayed, and the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset light pattern according to the big prize performance.

Next, as time passes, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), when the tenth game ball enters the big prize opening in the first round, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is reached. In addition, with this winning, the processing of step 042AKS064 shown in FIG. 10-5 is executed, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the number of winnings is displayed as "0150" as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-24). In addition, with this winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the big win performance, the attacca lamp 9c is lit in a manner to notify the winning as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-23). In addition, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is a period that is sufficient to count from a predetermined period after 10 game balls have entered. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after release, and 28.9 seconds even after the specified period has passed. Since the interval between successive shots is 0.6 seconds, this period is sufficient to allow 10 wins. Therefore, players can feel at ease knowing that there is enough time to win.

When the tenth game ball enters the big prize opening in the first round, this is the upper limit of the time period during which the big prize opening can be opened, and so the big prize opening is controlled to be closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-24). After that, until the second round shown in FIG. 10-6 begins, the big prize opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25). Meanwhile, until the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed (until the predetermined period has elapsed since n=2), as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-25), the round number display and big prize performance corresponding to the first round continue to be performed (the number of wins display is updated according to the win), and the performance effect lamp 9 lights up in response to the big prize performance as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-25).

In addition, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening in the first round and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be in a closed state. At this time, the so-called over-winning may occur, in which the eleventh game ball enters the large prize opening following the tenth game ball. Even in the case of the over-winning, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the winning number display of "0165" is displayed. In this case, the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are performed after the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the tenth winning, but as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25), the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from when the large prize opening is completely closed to when it becomes open corresponding to the second round. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that an over-winning has occurred in the first round, which can increase the interest in the game. In addition, since the update of the winning number display in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the winning number display in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is easy to determine which round the winning corresponds to. The winning sound corresponding to an over winning may be a sound (over winning sound) different from the normal winning sound. In this case, the over winning sound may be output when the count value exceeds the upper limit of "10". The attacca lamp 9c may also be illuminated in a manner corresponding to an over winning, different from the illumination in the normal winning mode.

Then, the timing comes for the large prize opening to be opened again as shown in FIG. 10-6 in response to the second round, and the large prize opening is controlled to be opened again as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-26). At this time, step 042AKS065 in FIG. 10-5 is judged as Yes, that is, a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, indicating the start of the n+1th round, is received, and the processing of 042AKS066 is executed, resulting in n=2. At this stage, the processing of step 042AKS055 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, so that the large prize presentation and round number display corresponding to the first round are performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-26) and (c-26) (see also FIG. 10-6).

Next, when the big prize opening is completely open and the game ball enters the big prize opening as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), unlike in the first round, in the processing of step 042AKS060 in FIG. 10-5, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-27), and the number of winning balls is displayed as "0165" as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-28). In addition, in response to the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the big win performance, the attacca lamp 9c is lit as shown in FIG. 10-13 (c-27). In this way, in rounds other than the first round, even if the winning occurs during a predetermined period, the number of winning balls is updated and displayed during the predetermined period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, so that, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), the round number display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round is performed, and the big win performance corresponding to the second round is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R", which is the first round, is changed to "2". That is, "R" is continuously displayed from the first round. Also, the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed. Also, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, an example is shown in which a common big win performance is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to the lighting control of the performance effect lamp 9), but the big win performance executed in each round may be different. The same applies to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9. In this way, the big prize opening is opened before the round number display indicating the second round is displayed, so the game balls of the player who has been continuously shot from the first round can be placed in the big prize opening at an early stage. Therefore, in each round of a multiple round game, it is possible to increase the possibility of the game balls shot in succession being placed in the big prize opening that was opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 10-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the large prize winning port is controlled to open in response to the second round, and as shown in Fig. 10-13 (a-29), (b-29), and (c-29), if a predetermined period has passed since the large prize winning port was completely opened without a game ball winning, the display of the number of winnings won in the first round will continue as is, as shown in Fig. 10-14 (a-31), (b-31), and (c-31). From then on, the same process is performed until the final round determined in advance, and when it is determined that a winning end designation command has been received in step 042AKS051 of Fig. 10-5, a setting is made to end the performance during the large prize corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending performance. In this way, for the second round and onwards, if no winning is won during the predetermined period, the display of the number of winnings displayed in the previous round will continue to be displayed, while if a winning is won during the predetermined period, the number of winning balls won will be added to the display of the number of winnings displayed in the previous round and displayed. This makes it easier to recognize when a jackpot has been won in the big prize slot, even in the second round and beyond.

For example, in the final round, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be closed, but in this case, the big win game state may end with the eleventh game ball stuck in the special variable prize ball device 7 (more specifically, between the large prize door and the glass door frame 3a) as shown in FIG. 10-15. In this case, the game ball will enter the large prize opening at the start of the first round in the next big win (when the large prize opening corresponding to the first round is opened), and the game ball will win during the specified period of the first round. In this case, too, the attacca lamp 9c is turned on in a manner to notify the player that a prize has been won, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), and after the specified period has elapsed, a count-up display is performed and then "0015" is displayed as the number of wins, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20) and (a-21). In such a case, there is a possibility that the launched game ball will win again during the specified period (the second ball may win), and in that case, after the specified period has elapsed, as shown in Figures 10-11 (a-20) and (a-21), a count-up display is performed, and then the winning number display directly shows "0030" instead of "0000" or "0015". This can provide a sense of surprise to the player, and increase the interest in the game.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 with characteristic part 042AK in this embodiment can achieve the following effects.

The presentation control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 a predetermined period of time after the large prize opening is opened and the first round is started. If a game ball does not enter the large prize opening within the predetermined period of time after the first round is started, a predetermined display is displayed after the predetermined period indicating that the number of winnings has not increased, and if a game ball enters the large prize opening within the predetermined period of time after the first round is started, a specific display of the number of winnings different from the predetermined display is displayed after the predetermined period of time. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game by displaying a specific display if a prize is won within the predetermined period of time, without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, if a game ball enters the big prize slot within a predetermined period of time after the start of the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 will not display the number of balls won as the predetermined display of "0000", but will directly display the number of balls won as the specific display of "0015". This will prevent confusion for the player and a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, if a game ball enters the big prize slot within a predetermined period of time after the start of the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a count-up display as a notification display that the number of prizes has increased, and then displays the number of prizes displayed as a special display: "0015." This makes it easier to recognize that a prize has been won and that the number of prizes is increasing.

The performance control CPU 120 also starts counting the timer value for a specified period from the timing when it receives a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, sent from the main board 11 in response to the large prize opening being opened, and displays the number of winnings after the specified period has elapsed. This allows the specified period to be counted appropriately, and a specific display to be made if a prize is won within the specified period, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, by closing the large prize opening door, the pachinko game machine 1 guides the launched game ball through the second path above the large prize opening door to the discharge path, while by opening the large prize opening door, the launched game ball is guided through the first path to the large prize opening and detected by the count switch 23. The special variable prize ball device 7 is configured so that the time it takes for a game ball present in the large prize opening door portion to be detected by the count switch 23 is a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds or less. This increases the likelihood that a game ball present above the large prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within the predetermined period from the opening of the large prize opening, and prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the presentation control CPU 120 displays to the player that he should hit to the right by performing a right-hit presentation as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-3) during the period from when the jackpot is hit until the jackpot opening is opened. This makes it easier to recognize the playing method and increases the player's interest in the game, as the playing area to be launched during the jackpot is suggested.

The open state of the large prize opening is when the large prize opening is completely open, that is, when the large prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open. In response to detecting that the large prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open, a large prize opening open command is sent from the main board 11. This counts the specified period from when the large prize opening is completely open, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, even if a game ball (a game ball that has been thrown quickly) is released by performing a right-hit performance before the start of the first round (before the large prize opening is open), if it is above the large prize opening when the large prize opening is opened, it can win within a specified period corresponding to the first round, and if a prize is won within the specified period, the performance control CPU 120 will display the number of balls won as a special display after the specified period. This prevents game balls that have been thrown quickly from going to waste.

For example, in the final round, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be closed, but in this case, as shown in FIG. 10-15, the big win game state may end with the eleventh game ball stuck in the special variable prize ball device 7 (more specifically, between the large prize door and the glass door frame 3a). In this case, when the next big win occurs, the game ball will enter the large prize opening at the start of the first round (when the large prize opening corresponding to the first round is opened), and the entry of game balls during the specified period of the first round occurs, and the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings as a specific display after the specified period has elapsed. This can prevent players from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation can also execute a fanfare presentation to suggest that a jackpot game state has been reached during the time when the jackpot opening changes from a closed state to an open state. After the jackpot opening is opened and a specified period of time has passed, the number of rounds played can be displayed along with the number of wins, and a jackpot presentation corresponding to round play can be executed. This can add variety to the presentation and increase interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), if a game ball enters the large prize opening during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 lights up the attacca lamp 9c as shown in FIG. 10-10(c-18). Also, as shown in FIG. 10-12(b-23), if a game ball enters the large prize opening outside the specified period, the presentation control CPU 120 lights up the attacca lamp 9c as shown in FIG. 10-12(c-23). This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and makes it easier to visually confirm that a prize has been won within the specified period.

The performance control CPU 120 also causes the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5 (similar to step 042AKS064) to light up in a manner (a manner to notify the player that a prize has been won) that is greater than the number of times per unit time that game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that light up during the jackpot performance. This makes it easier to visually confirm that the game ball has entered the jackpot opening, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), if a game ball enters the large prize opening during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), if a game ball enters the large prize opening outside the specified period, the presentation control CPU 120 outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning. This makes it easier to recognize that a game ball has entered the large prize opening, which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, for rounds after the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the round number corresponding to the round in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the round. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, as a specific display is made if a prize is won within the predetermined period of time, and also increases the possibility of consecutively launched game balls winning a prize in a large prize slot that opens earlier than the round display in each round of multiple round play.

In addition, when a round of play from the second round onwards is being played, if the gaming medium does not enter the large prize opening within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the number of balls won that was displayed in the previous round of play, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-31), while if the gaming medium enters the large prize opening within the specified period of time, the presentation control CPU 120 adds the number of balls won that were awarded in response to the winning to the number of balls displayed in the previous round of play, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30). This makes it easier to recognize a winning entry into the large prize opening even in the second round onwards.

In addition, even if an over-winning occurs, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the count-up display as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23) and displays the number of winnings of "0165". In this case, after the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are displayed next, but as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25), the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from when the large winning port is completely closed to when it is opened corresponding to the second round. This makes it easy to determine which opening the winning corresponds to, since the update of the number of winnings display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the number of winnings display at the time of the next opening.

In addition, during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, i.e., when the number of winning balls is not displayed, the presentation control CPU 120 only lights up the attacca lamp 9c when the game ball enters the large prize opening, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). However, when the number of winning balls is displayed after the specified period has elapsed, the presentation effect lamp 9 on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the presentation effect lamp 9 on the game board 2 are alternately lit, as shown in, for example, FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), and the presentation effect lamp 9 is illuminated more than during the specified period. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and to enhance the presentation after the number of winning balls is displayed after the specified period, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute a right-hit effect and a fanfare effect before the start of the first round as shown in FIG. 10-6, and after the big prize opening is opened, the effect lamps 9 may be sequentially lit to suggest a right hit as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to FIG. 10-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period has elapsed, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the effect lamps 9 on the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the effect lamps 9 on the game board 2 are alternately lit as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21). This allows the effect lamps 9 to be used to suggest a right hit. Also, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit to suggest a right hit after the big prize opening is opened, the last lighted attacca lamp 9c may be left lit as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15) without being turned off, and this allows the player to be aware that the big prize opening has been opened.

In addition, the maximum period for which the big prize opening can be opened is set to a period long enough for 10 game balls to win, even if it is counted from the end of a certain period. This gives players a sense of security because they are guaranteed a sufficient amount of time for a prize to be won.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 does not light up the presentation effect lamp 9 as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the large prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, i.e., until the number of winnings is displayed, but instead lights up the presentation effect lamp 9 after the number of winnings after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Fig. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22). This makes it possible to restrain the player from firing too quickly and to encourage the timing of firing.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the presentation control CPU 120 illuminates the presentation effect lamp 9 at the same timing as the execution of the jackpot presentation after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. This allows the presentation to be instantly livened up at the timing when the jackpot presentation is executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, when the number of winning symbols is displayed, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation displays a transitional effect display of decorative symbols and star-shaped images that constitute a jackpot in a manner that suggests hitting to the right. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that they should hit to the right, as the effect display suggests that they should hit to the right.

(Modification of characteristic portion 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), after the right-hit effect by the effect effect lamps 9, which indicate that the player should hit the right by lighting up the effect effect lamps 9 in sequence, is completed, all the effect effect lamps 9 are turned off, but this is only one example. For example, after the state shown in Fig. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the state shown in Fig. 10-16 (a-16A), (b-16A), and (c-16A) may be transitioned to, and at the timing when the large prize winning hole is opened (Fig. 10-16 (b-16A)), the attacca lamp 9c provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 may be turned on as shown in Fig. 10-16 (c-16A). According to this, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize that the large prize winning hole is opened. The attacca lamp 9c may be continuously turned on until a predetermined period has elapsed or during the opening period.

In the above embodiment, when updating the round display from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2", and "R" is continuously displayed from the first round and "1R" is continuously displayed until the specified period of the second round has elapsed. However, this is only an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the open state corresponding to the first round ends, that is, when the big prize winning port becomes closed, the "1" in the "1R" display may be erased and only "R" may be displayed. Then, when the specified period of the second round has elapsed, "2" may be displayed, and the round display of "2R" indicating the second round may be displayed. The same applies to the second round and after. This allows the end of each round to be visually confirmed, and the game can be made more interesting.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the maximum number of winning balls during the period in which the large winning port can be opened is 10 (the maximum number of winning balls is 10), but for example, the maximum number of winning balls may be set to 1, and if 2 balls are won during the specified period before the number of rounds is displayed, it may be considered an over winning ball. In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound may be output as the winning sound for an over winning ball during the specified period (over winning sound), and the attacca lamp 9c may be illuminated in a manner indicating the occurrence of an over winning ball.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the winning number display counted the number of game balls entering the jackpot, but in addition to this, winnings into the general winning port 10 during a jackpot may also be counted. Note that since right-handed shots are performed during a jackpot, the general winning port into which the winning ball is entered is the general winning port 10 located above the variable winning ball device 6B. Figure 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in which winnings into the general winning port 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Note that explanations of parts similar to those in Figure 10-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS056 that a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), it is further determined whether or not a general winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won a general winning port 10 has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, if a general winning designation command has been received, i.e., if a winning ball has been won in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS081; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or if a general winning designation command has not been received, i.e., if no winning ball has been won in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS059. In addition, when a ball wins at the general winning port 10, a winning sound (a winning sound different from the winning sound when a ball wins at the large winning port) may be output to indicate that the game ball has won at the general winning port 10.

In addition, in the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS062 that a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS062; No), it is further determined whether or not a general winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won into general winning port 10 has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, if a general winning designation command has been received, i.e., if there has been a winning into general winning port 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS083) and updates and displays the number of balls won (step 042AKS085). Even when updating and displaying the number of balls won in step 042AKS085, a count-up display (announcement display indicating that the number of balls won is increasing) is performed before the number of balls won is displayed. After executing the processing of step 042AKS085, or if the general winning designation command has not been received, i.e., if there has been no winning in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the processing proceeds to step 042AKS065. In addition, when a game ball wins in the general winning port 10, a winning sound (a winning sound different from the winning sound when a game ball wins in the large winning port) may be output to indicate that the game ball has won in the general winning port 10.

Next, an example of the performance operation when the winning of the general winning opening 10 is also counted will be described with reference to Fig. 10-19 and Fig. 10-20. Fig. 10-19 and Fig. 10-20 are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device 5, the open/closed state of the large winning opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Fig. 10-19 are the same as (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Fig. 10-10. When the large winning opening is opened as shown in the figure, a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 10, the state transitions to the state shown in Fig. 10-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball enters the general winning port 10 as shown in FIG. 10-19 (b-18A), or after time has passed without the game ball entering either the large winning port or the general winning port 10 from the state shown in FIG. 10-19 (b-17), and after a predetermined period has passed as shown in FIG. 10-19 (a-19A), (b-19A), and (c-19A), if the game ball enters the general winning port 10, the state transitions to the state shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), (b-20A), and (c-20A), and as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is performed, and a count-up display is performed. Also, at the same time as these displays, as a big win during performance (first round during performance), as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), the decorative pattern constituting the big win, the display of "BOUNUS", and the character are displayed. During the big win performance, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (c-20A), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset lighting pattern according to the big win performance. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the number of wins.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has passed without a game ball winning the general winning slot 10, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-22A), the count-up display is not performed and "0000" is displayed as the winning number display. Note that the following are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won: the round number display "1R" is displayed to indicate one round, the jackpot performance (first round performance) includes the display of decorative patterns that constitute the jackpot, the display "BOUNUS in progress" and a character, and the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset lighting pattern according to the jackpot performance.

In this way, even if a game ball enters the general winning port 10 during the specified period after the big winning port is opened at the start of the first round, as in the above embodiment, after the specified period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the winning number display corresponding to the winning of the general winning port 10. Also, if no game balls enter the general winning port 10 during the specified period, "0000" is displayed as the specified display indicating that no prize balls have been awarded. Therefore, since the winning number display corresponding to the winning is also displayed for game balls that have entered the general winning port 10 during the specified period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 042AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change the gaming medium to a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible for the gaming medium to win a prize, and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 that performs a round game) that can execute a round game multiple times to change the variable winning means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state, and the display means is capable of displaying an amount of award related to the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the gaming medium winning the variable winning means (e.g., a display that displays the number of wins). and the like), when the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the winning number display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port has been opened), and if the gaming medium does not win a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period of time, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display), and if the gaming medium wins a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period of time, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).

With this configuration, if a win occurs within a specified period, a specific display is displayed, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the display means may be configured to display the specific display without displaying the predetermined display if the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period (for example, displaying "0015" instead of "0000").

This configuration can prevent players from becoming confused and losing interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, when a gaming medium wins in the variable winning means within the specified period, the display means may display a count-up indication indicating that the gaming value has been awarded, and then display the specific indication according to the awarded gaming value (for example, displaying a count-up indication as a notification indication that the number of winnings is increasing, and then displaying "0015").

This configuration makes it easier for players to recognize that they have won a prize and the number of prizes they have won increases.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means may start displaying the award amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed after receiving a command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, by starting counting the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving a command to specify that the large winning port is open, transmitted from the main board 11).

With this configuration, the specified period is counted appropriately, and if a win occurs within the specified period, a specific display is made, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above, the variable winning means may include a path forming means including a first path that leads the gaming medium to the winning path when the first state is reached (for example, by opening the large prize opening door, the launched gaming ball is led through the first path to the large prize opening), and a second path that leads the gaming medium to the discharge path when the second state is reached (for example, by closing the large prize opening door, the launched gaming ball is led through the second path above the large prize opening door to the discharge path), and a detection means (for example, a count switch 23, etc.) that is formed within the winning path and detects the winning of the gaming medium, and the time that the gaming medium travels from the path forming means to the detection means may be within the specified period (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the gaming ball present at the large prize opening door is detected by the count switch 23 is within the specified period of 0.6 seconds, etc.).

This configuration increases the likelihood that a gaming ball present above the large prize opening will be detected within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above, after the machine is controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation prompting display may be displayed to encourage the player to perform an operation (for example, between the time when a jackpot is hit and the time when the jackpot opening is opened, a right-hit display may be displayed to inform the player that he or she should hit the right, as shown in FIG. 10-7(a-3)).

This configuration suggests the operations that should be performed while in an advantageous state, making it easier to understand how to play and increasing interest in the game.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above, the first state may be a state in which the variable prize door included in the variable prize means is completely open (for example, the open state of the large prize opening is a state in which the large prize opening is completely open, that is, the large prize opening door has moved to a position in which it is completely open, and a large prize opening open command is sent from the main board 11 in response to detecting that the large prize opening door has moved to a position in which it is completely open).

With this configuration, the specified period is counted from the time the big prize opening is fully open, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above, if the gaming medium launched by the operation prompting display before the start of the first round of play in the advantageous state wins in the variable winning means, the specific display may be displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, a gaming ball launched by a right-hit performance before the start of the first round may win at the timing when the large winning opening is opened, and if the gaming medium wins within the predetermined period, the number of winnings may be displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period).

This configuration can prevent game media that are released before a round of play begins from going to waste.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (8) above, when the advantageous state ends in a state where a gaming medium is sandwiched when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state in the last round of the multiple rounds in the advantageous state (for example, the big win game state ends with the eleventh gaming ball sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big win door and the glass door frame 3a) as shown in FIG. 10-15 in the final round), and the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state in the first round when the advantageous state is again controlled, the specific display may be displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the next big win occurs, the gaming ball enters the big win opening at the start of the first round, and the number of winnings is displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period has elapsed).

This configuration can prevent players from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (9) above, when the machine is controlled to the advantageous state, during the time when the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the machine has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, during the time when the large prize opening goes from a closed state to an open state, it is possible to execute a fanfare effect that suggests that the large prize game state has been entered), and when the display of the amount of prize awarded starts after the specified period has elapsed, it is possible to execute a round game display that can identify the round game being played and a round-in-progress effect corresponding to the round game (for example, after the large prize opening goes into an open state and a specified period has elapsed, it is possible to display the number of rounds together with the number of prizes won, and execute a large prize-in-progress effect corresponding to the round game).

This configuration can add variety to the presentation and increase interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 043AK)
The characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 043AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 043AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win a prize and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win a prize,
and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.) capable of executing a round game multiple times in which, when controlled to the advantageous state, the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state, and the display means is capable of displaying an amount of granted relating to the amount of gaming value granted as a result of a gaming medium winning in the variable winning means (e.g., displaying the number of winnings), and when the first of the multiple round games is played, the amount of granted is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (e.g., in the first round, displaying the number of winnings after a predetermined period has elapsed after a large winning opening is opened), and if a gaming medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the gaming value is granted as the amount of granted display after the predetermined period has elapsed. the predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game medium has not won (for example, by displaying "0000" as the number of winnings), and if the game medium wins in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, by displaying "0015" as the number of winnings), and further includes a light-emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9) and a light-emitting control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) for controlling the light-emitting means, and the light-emitting control means controls the light-emitting means with a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the game medium winning when the game medium wins in the variable winning means after the predetermined period has elapsed and when the game medium wins in the variable winning means before the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when a game ball wins in a large winning port, the attacca lamp 9c is illuminated regardless of whether the winning occurs within the predetermined period).

With this configuration, if a prize is won within a specified period of time, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and also makes it easier for the player to visually confirm that a prize has been won within the specified period of time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the light emitting means may include a specific light emitting means (such as an attacca lamp 9c) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a gaming medium enters the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (such as a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c), and the light emitted by the specific light emitting means when a gaming medium enters the variable winning means may be emitted more times per unit time than the light emitted by the predetermined light emitting means (for example, the light emitted by the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (similarly in step 042AKS064) may be emitted in a manner (a manner in which a win has been notified) that is greater than the light emitted per unit time by the gaming effect lamp 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that emits light during the performance during a jackpot).

This configuration makes it easier to visually confirm that the game ball has entered the big prize slot, increasing interest in the game.

(3) The gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above may further include a sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), which outputs a winning sound corresponding to a winning when the gaming medium enters the variable winning means, and which outputs the winning sound both when the gaming medium enters the variable winning means after the specified period has elapsed and when the gaming medium enters the variable winning means before the specified period has elapsed (for example, when a gaming ball enters a large winning port, the winning sound may be output regardless of whether the winning occurs within the specified period).

This configuration makes it easier to recognize when a game ball has entered the big prize slot, increasing interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 044AK)
The characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 044AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 044AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change the gaming medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible to win a prize, and a round game that changes the variable winning means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state. and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 for performing a round game, etc.) that can be executed a plurality of times, the display means being capable of displaying an amount of granted relating to the amount of granted gaming value granted as a result of a gaming medium winning at the variable winning means (e.g., displaying the number of winnings), and being capable of displaying a round game display that can identify the round game being played (e.g., displaying the number of rounds), and displaying a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the first of the plurality of round games is played. and when a second or subsequent round game is played among a plurality of round games, the round game display corresponding to the second or subsequent round game is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (for example, in the second round, the round number display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened). If a gaming medium does not win a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display). If a gaming medium wins a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).

With this configuration, if a prize is won within a specified period of time, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and increases the chances that consecutively shot game balls will win a prize in a large prize slot that opens earlier than the round display in each round of multiple rounds of play.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, when the second or subsequent round of play is played, if the gaming medium does not enter the variable winning means within a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, the award amount display displayed in the previous round of play continues to be displayed (for example, when the second or subsequent round of play is played, if the gaming medium does not enter the large winning port within a predetermined period of time after the large winning port is opened, the winning number display displayed in the previous round of play continues to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-31)). When the second or subsequent round of play is played, if the game medium wins in the variable winning means within a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, the amount of the award corresponding to the game value awarded in response to the winning may be added to the amount of the award displayed in the previous round of play and displayed (for example, if the game medium wins in the large winning slot within a predetermined period of time, the number of balls won awarded in response to the winning may be added to the number of balls won displayed in the previous round of play and displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30)).

This configuration makes it easier to recognize when a jackpot has been won in the big prize slot even during the second or subsequent rounds of play.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the display means may be capable of updating the displayed display of the amount of prize awarded in response to a gaming medium winning in the variable prize winning means, and the updating of the display of the amount of prize awarded may be completed once the variable prize winning means changes from the first state to the second state, and before it returns to the first state (for example, the count-up display and the display of the number of prizes won corresponding to the over prize may be completed within the period from when the large prize winning port is completely closed to when it becomes an open state corresponding to the second round).

With this configuration, the update of the winning number display when one opening occurs does not overlap with the update of the winning number display when the next opening occurs, making it easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning prize.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 045AK)
The characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 045AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 045AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change the gaming medium to a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible to win a prize, and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.) that can execute a round game multiple times to change the variable winning means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state, The display means is capable of displaying a grant amount display relating to the amount of gaming value granted as a result of the gaming medium winning at the variable winning means (for example, by displaying the number of wins), and when the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, displays the grant amount display after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, displays the number of wins after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and if the gaming medium does not win at the variable winning means within the predetermined period, displays the grant amount display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been granted after the predetermined period has elapsed. a predetermined display (for example, displaying "0000" as the number of winnings), and if the gaming medium wins in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, displaying "0015" as the number of winnings), and the game machine further comprises a plurality of light-emitting means (for example, performance effect lamps 9, etc.) and a light-emitting control means (for example, performance control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light-emitting means, wherein the light-emitting control means is more likely to display a specific display when the variable winning means is in the first state and the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed than a specific display when the variable winning means is in the first state and the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed. The present invention is characterized in that it controls the light-emitting means to emit more light than when the award amount display is not displayed before the period has elapsed (for example, during a specified period, i.e., when the number of winnings is not displayed, only the attacca lamp 9c is lit when the game ball enters the large winning hole, as shown in Figure 10-10 (c-18), but when the number of winnings is displayed after the specified period has elapsed, the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit, as shown in Figures 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), and more performance effect lamps 9 are emitted than during the specified period).

With this configuration, if a win is made within a specified period, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and also enhances the presentation after the number of wins is displayed after the specified period, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, after the game machine is controlled to the advantageous state, and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation prompting display for encouraging the player to perform an operation can be displayed (for example, by displaying a right-hit display), and the light-emitting means includes a specific light-emitting means (for example, an attacca lamp 9c, etc.) located in the vicinity of the variable winning means that emits light when a gaming medium enters the variable winning means, and a predetermined light-emitting means other than the specific light-emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c, etc.), and when the variable winning means is in the first state, if the award amount display before the predetermined period has elapsed is not displayed, the specific light-emitting means is illuminated while the predetermined light-emitting means is illuminated in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the operation prompting display, and the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed. When the special light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are illuminated in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, after the big prize opening is opened, the performance effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit as shown in FIG. 10-7(c-3) to FIG. 10-9(c-13) until a predetermined period has elapsed to suggest a right hit, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the performance effect lamps 9 on the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the performance effect lamps 9 on the game board 2 are alternately lit as shown in FIG. 10-11(c-20) and (c-21), and when the performance effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right hit, after the last lit up attacca lamp 9c is lit, it is not turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9(c-15) and remains lit).

This configuration can encourage operation using the specified light emitting means, and can also make the player aware that the variable winning means has entered the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the round of play may be terminated when a specific number of gaming media are won, and transition to the next round of play (for example, the winning of 10 gaming balls is the upper limit of the period during which the large prize opening can be opened), and the time from the lapse of the specified period until the variable prize winning means enters the second state may be a sufficient time for the gaming media to win the specific number of games (for example, the upper limit of the period during which the large prize opening can be opened may be a sufficient period even if counted from the lapse of the specified period for 10 gaming balls to win).

This configuration gives players a sense of security because it guarantees them sufficient time to win.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, one round of play ends when a specific number of game balls are won, and transitions to the next round of play (for example, the winning of 10 game balls is the upper limit of the period during which the large prize opening can be opened), and the time from the end of the specified period until the variable prize winning means enters the second state is sufficient for the game media to win the specific number of game balls (for example, the upper limit of the period during which the large prize opening can be opened is sufficient for 10 game balls to win, even if counted from the end of the specified period), and the variable prize winning When the means is in the first state, the light emission of the light emitting means may be restricted when the display of the amount of the award before the predetermined period has elapsed is not displayed, and the light emitting means may be made to emit light only after the display of the amount of the award after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the performance effect lamp 9 may not be illuminated until the large prize opening is opened and the predetermined period has elapsed, i.e., until the number of prizes is displayed, and as shown in Figs. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 may be illuminated only after the display of the number of prizes after the predetermined period has elapsed).

This configuration discourages players from firing too quickly and encourages them to fire at the right time.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above, when the machine is controlled to the advantageous state, during the time when the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, it may be possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the machine has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare effect may be executed), and when the display of the award amount display starts after the specified period has elapsed, it may be possible to execute a round game display that can identify the round game being played and a mid-round effect corresponding to the round game (for example, a round number display, a number of wins display, and a jackpot mid-play effect may be executed after the specified period has elapsed), and the light-emitting means may be illuminated at the same timing as the execution of the mid-round effect (for example, as shown in Figures 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect lamp 9 may be illuminated at the same timing as the execution of the jackpot mid-play effect).

This configuration allows the performance to be instantly heightened when the mid-round performance is executed, increasing interest in the game.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above, a general winning means (e.g., a general winning port 10, etc.) through which a gaming medium can win a prize is further provided, and the display means is capable of displaying the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the gaming medium winning in the general winning means as the awarded amount display (e.g., displaying an acquisition number display in response to a winning in the general winning port 10, etc.), and if the gaming medium does not win in the general winning means within the specified period, a specified display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the specified period has elapsed (e.g., If no game balls enter the general winning opening 10 during a fixed period, a predetermined display of "0000" may be displayed to indicate that no prize balls have been awarded), and if a game medium enters the general winning means within the specified period, a display corresponding to the winning of the general winning means may be displayed as the awarded amount display after the specified period has elapsed (for example, if a game ball enters the general winning opening 10 during a specified period after the large winning opening is opened, after the specified period has elapsed, a display of "0003" may be displayed as the number of winnings corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening 10).

With this configuration, even if a player wins a general prize during a specified period, a display corresponding to the winning of the general prize is also displayed, preventing players from feeling anxious.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above, the variable winning means may be provided in a predetermined area in the game area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 may be provided in the game area on the right side), the display means may display a first image (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot) at the same timing as the display of the amount of the prize, and the first image may be displayed with an effect at the same timing as the display of the amount of the prize during the advantageous state (for example, an effect display that moves the decorative pattern constituting a jackpot), and the effect display may be displayed in a manner that suggests the predetermined area (for example, an effect display that moves the decorative pattern constituting a jackpot to the rear right, front, and rear left, suggesting a right hit).

With this configuration, the effect display suggests the play area to be launched, making it easier for the player to recognize the play area to be launched.

(Description of the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the first embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH will be described with reference to Figs. 11-1 to 11-4. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH, an acquisition number display relating to the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state and an acquisition number notification display for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state has reached a predetermined number can be displayed. The characters used in the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used in the acquisition number display are not visible from the specific area against the background image during a jackpot. The specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display are visible from the specific area against the background image during a jackpot.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic part 20SH having such features. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Background Art Related to the First Aspect of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 11A is a diagram showing the background art related to the first aspect of the characteristic portion 20SH.

When a pachinko game machine is controlled to a jackpot game state, it may display an acquisition number display relating to the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 11-1(A). In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), the acquisition number display shows "120 points" corresponding to the number of acquired balls being 120.

The winning number display uses numbers to indicate the number of winning balls, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a winning number display. The numbers used to display the winning number are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc. The winning number display shown in Figure 11-1 (A) uses the word "points" to make it clear that it is a winning number display, and the number "120" to indicate the number of winning balls.

Some of the characters used to display the number of acquisitions form a special area. Here, a special area is an area that is surrounded by the lines that form the character, and does not connect to the area outside the lines that form the character. Here, "not connecting to the area outside the lines that form the character" includes cases where the "special area" is completely isolated from the "area outside the lines that form the character" by the "lines that form the character", and cases where the "special area" is not completely isolated from the "area outside the lines that form the character" by the "lines that form the character", but appears to be a separate area at first glance. In the following explanation, characters that form a special area are referred to as "special characters".

For example, in the case of Arabic numerals, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. That is, in the case of the Arabic numerals "0", "6", "8", and "9", the specific region is an approximately circular region surrounded by the curves that form the character. In the case of the Arabic numeral "8", two specific regions are formed. In the case of the Arabic numeral "4", the specific region is a triangular region surrounded by the three straight lines that form the character.

When the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 11-1(A), a jackpot background image relating to the jackpot gaming state is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), a jackpot background image of a flying "butterfly" is displayed. The jackpot background image is an image that is displayed behind other displays displayed on the image display device in the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot background image contains many lines that represent animated pictures and effects.

The number of wins display is displayed small in an edge area of the display area of the image display device that does not impede the visibility of the background image during a jackpot. When the background image during a jackpot changes over time, the lines of the background image during a jackpot may overlap the back of the number of wins display. If a specific character is displayed in the number of wins display, such as the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Figure 11-1 (A), when the lines of the background image during a jackpot overlap the back of a specific area of the specific character, the lines of the background image during a jackpot may blend in with the lines that form the specific character, causing the specific character to appear as a different character than it actually is.

Figure 11-1 (B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Figure 11-1 (A). In the example shown in Figures 11-1 (A) and (B), the "butterfly" lines of the background image during a jackpot overlap the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of wins, and the "butterfly" lines of the background image during a jackpot blend in with the lines that form the specific character "0," making the specific character "0" look like the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0."

In this way, if the characters showing the number of balls won are mistaken for characters that are different from the actual characters, the number of balls awarded during a jackpot game cannot be accurately recognized. However, it is difficult to adjust the position of the lines included in the background image during a jackpot so that the lines do not overlap with specific areas of specific characters.

The first form of characteristic part 20SH was created in consideration of this background. The first form of characteristic part 20SH is described below.

(Display of Acquisition Number in First Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 11-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH.

In the first form of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific regions 20SHI1 of the Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions, which correspond to the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9", are displayed in a non-transparent display mode that differs from the display mode of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-2(A), the color of the lines 20SHS1 of the Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions is "black", while the specific regions 20SHI1 of the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" are displayed in "white".

In addition, the display mode of the specific region 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters, but may be a display mode that has a high contrast with the display mode of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters to the extent that the specific region 20SHI1 and the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters can be accurately distinguished.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color that has a high contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a brightness that has a low contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a brightness that has a high contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color that has a low contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a high contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with high contrast relative to the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color with low contrast relative to the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a brightness with low contrast relative to the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with low contrast relative to the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters.

Of the characters used to display the number of balls won, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the number of balls won, and specific characters other than numerals to recognize that the number of balls won is displayed, are displayed in a display mode in which the specific area is not transparent and is different from the display mode of the lines that form the characters, as in the Arabic numerals shown in Figure 11-2 (A).

(Display of Acquisition Number in the First Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 11-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH.

When the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko game machine 1 displays a winning number notification display to notify the player of this fact.

Here, the time-saving control and the probability variable control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are ended when a predetermined number of special game games are played, or when the jackpot game state is entered before a predetermined number of special game games are played. However, for example, the number of time-saving control and the probability variable control may be different for each type of jackpot, and in the case of a specific type of jackpot, the high probability control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state may be continuously executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. In such a case, the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, resulting in a so-called consecutive state.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in a consecutive win state, when the number of prize balls awarded in multiple jackpot game states in the consecutive win state reaches a predetermined number, a winning number notification display is displayed to notify that fact.

The winning number notification display uses numbers to display the predetermined number of balls awarded during a jackpot game state when that number is reached, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a winning number notification display. The numbers used in the winning number notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

Among the characters used in the acquisition number notification display, there are some that correspond to specific characters. In the first form of the characteristic part 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the specific regions of the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display are displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the specific regions 20SHI2 of the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used in the acquisition number notification display are displayed in a transparent display mode.

Of the characters used in the winning number notification display, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying a predetermined number when the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot game state is reached, and specific characters other than numerals for recognizing that it is a winning number notification display, are displayed in a transparent display mode in specific areas, like the Arabic numerals shown in Figure 11-2 (B).

(Appearance of Acquisition Number Display in First Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
Fig. 11-3(A) is a diagram showing how the acquisition number display appears in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH. Fig. 11-3(B) is an enlarged view of the part of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Fig. 11-1(A).

In the example shown in Figures 11-3 (A) and (B), the "butterfly" line of the background image during a jackpot overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the number of wins display 20SHK, but because specific area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white," the background image during a jackpot cannot be seen from specific area 20SHI1. Therefore, in specific area 20SHI1, the "butterfly" line 20SHHS of the background image during a jackpot does not blend in with the line 20SHS1 that forms the specific character "0," and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0."

In addition to the number of winnings display 20SHK, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot display 20SHO to let the player know that it is in a jackpot game state, a decorative pattern display 20SHZ that shows the confirmed decorative pattern that is the jackpot combination that is derived and displayed when it is in a jackpot game state, a round number display 20SHR that shows the number of rounds in the round game in the jackpot game state, and a right hit display 20SHM that suggests to the player that he should hit to the right. Like the number of winnings display 20SHK, the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right hit display 20SHM are also displayed small in the edge area of the display area of the image display device 5 so as not to obstruct the visibility of the background image during a jackpot.

The characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-hand hit display 20SHM may include characters of the same type as those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and characters of a different type than those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. In this embodiment, the characters in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are "numbers" and "katakana" as shown in FIG. 11-4. On the other hand, the jackpot display 20SHO uses "alphabet" and "kanji", which are characters of a different type than those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. Also, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ uses "numbers", which are characters of the same type as those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. The round number display 20SHR uses "numbers", which are the same type of characters as those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and "alphabet", which are different types of characters from those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. The right-hand hit display 20SHM uses "kanji", "hiragana", and "symbols", which are different types of characters from those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display.

Some of the characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-hit display 20SHM are specific characters, regardless of the type of character. The specific areas of the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-hit display 20SHM are non-transparent, just like the specific area 20SHI1 of the number of wins display 20SHK, and are displayed in a different display mode from the line 20SHS1 that forms the characters, so the background image during a jackpot cannot be seen from the specific area 20SHI1.

(Example of the performance of the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-4 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation operation of the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the display area of the image display device 5 is divided into a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52, which is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, and various displays are performed by distinguishing between them. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the area inside the two-dot chain line is the first display area 20SH51, and the area outside the two-dot chain line is the second display area 20SH52.

As shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays a background image during a jackpot in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 also displays an acquisition number display 20SHK in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the second display area 20SH52 also displays a jackpot display, a decorative pattern display, a round number display, and a right hit display.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. In FIG. 11-4(A), the number of points won 20SHK is displayed, indicating "990 points," so it can be recognized that 990 game balls have been paid out as prize balls in the big win game state. The performance control CPU 120 updates the number in the number of points won 20SHK each time a game ball is paid out in the big win game state.

In this situation, suppose a gaming ball enters the big prize slot and 15 gaming balls are paid out as prize balls.

In response to the dispensing of 15 game balls, the performance control CPU 120 counts up the number of winning balls display 20SHK by one from "990" to "1005", as shown in Figures 11-4 (B) to (G). In this case, the number of winning balls display 20SHK will go through the round number "1000", which is a so-called "kiriban". In other words, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached "1000 balls".

Here, the presentation control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display each time "1000" game balls are paid out in the jackpot game state. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display of "Over 1000" when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", and displays an acquisition number notification display of "Over 2000" when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "2000".

When the number in the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches the round number "1000", the performance control CPU 120 displays a part of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH on the right edge of the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (D). Then, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (E) to (G), the performance control CPU 120 moves the display position of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, which is displayed in each frame of the image while the number in the acquisition number display 20SHK changes from "1000" to "1005", from the right edge of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center of the first display area 20SH51. Then, when the number in the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches "1005", the performance control CPU 120 stops and displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (G). In this case, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

By this type of display control, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so that it frames in from the outside to the inside of the display area of the image display device 5.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (H), the performance control CPU 120 moves the display position of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH displayed in each frame of the video from the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 toward the left edge of the display area.

By this display control, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so that it frames out from the inside to the outside of the display area of the image display device 5, and the display ends when it is no longer displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

The performance control CPU 120 may determine that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has started when the number on the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches a "round number" and that a part of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has been displayed, and may perform display control to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when a predetermined period of time has passed from that timing. The performance control CPU 120 may also determine that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has started when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has been stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and may perform display control to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when a predetermined period of time has passed from that timing.

As mentioned above, the specific area of the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a transparent display mode. Therefore, as shown in Figures 11-4 (E) to (H), the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. For example, in the example shown in Figures 11-4 (E) to (H), the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the Arabic numeral "0", which is the specific character used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH.

In addition, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in Figures 11-4 (D) to (H).

The presentation mode when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51 is not limited to the presentation mode in which the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in, stopped, and then framed out. For example, instead of the presentation in which the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be presented to jump out from the back side of the screen to the front side, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be presented to gradually emerge, or a character may appear and display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in a speech bubble showing the character's lines. Also, instead of making the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH frame out, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be made to be sucked from the front side of the screen to the back side, or the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be made to gradually disappear, or when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a speech bubble showing the character's lines, the character may be made to leave.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a background image during a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display an acquisition number display 20SHK relating to the number of awarded prize balls in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display region 20SH51, an acquisition number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "round number" on the front side of the background image during the jackpot, an acquisition number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls", and an acquisition number notification display of "over 2000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls". The acquisition number display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends its display when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of display. The characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK. The characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. The specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK do not allow the background image during a jackpot to be seen from the specific area. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH allow the background image during a jackpot to be seen from the specific area.

With this configuration, the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display 20SHKH, which include the specific characters, can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during a jackpot. For example, when a player checks the number of winning balls in a jackpot game state, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and if the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters may appear different from the actual characters. However, by making the background image during a jackpot invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. Also, unlike the winning number display 20SHK, the winning number notification display 20SHKH is not constantly displayed during a jackpot game state, but is displayed for a limited period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches a "round number." Since it is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, by making the background image during a jackpot visible from a specific area of the specific letters, it is possible to show at least a little of the background image during a jackpot in the prominent display position of the first display area.

As mentioned above, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9".

This configuration allows the number of wins display 20SHK and the number of wins notification display 20SHKH, which use Arabic numerals, to be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during a jackpot.

Also, as described above, when the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number display 20SHK, it displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH.

With this configuration, even when the winning number notification display 20SHKH is displayed, the number of winning balls in the jackpot game state can be accurately ascertained from the winning number display 20SHK.

As described above, the image display device 5 can also display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

This configuration makes the winning number notification display 20SHKH easier for the player to see, and can conveniently notify the player that the number of winning balls awarded during a jackpot game has reached the "kiriban" number.

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hit display 20SHM in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. The characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hit display 20SHM include characters of the same type as the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and characters of a different type from the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and each type of character includes a specific character that forms a specific area surrounded by lines that form the character. Furthermore, the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-hand hit display 20SHM are not visible from the specific area of the background image during the jackpot.

With this configuration, the specific characters can be accurately recognized for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hand hit display 20SHM.

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH by stopping it in the first display area 20SH51, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in to the stopping position in the first display area 20SH51, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed out.

This configuration can improve the presentation effect when the winning number notification display 20SHKH is displayed.

(Second form of characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to Fig. 11-5 to Fig. 11-7. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH, the ratio of the size of the specific region of the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH to the region of the lines forming the characters is smaller than that of the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to the second form of the characteristic part 20SH having such features. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Display of Acquisition Number in Second Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 11-5(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the characteristic part 20SH uses three-dimensional characters to display the winning number notification. Here, three-dimensional characters are a character format that makes the characters appear to jump out in front of the player. The line area that forms the three-dimensional characters includes an area 20SHS21 that represents the characters, and an area 20SHS22 that represents the depth of the three-dimensional characters.

Among these three-dimensional characters, there are some that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-5(A), the specific regions 20SHI3 of the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the number of wins notification, which correspond to specific characters "0," "4," "6," "8," and "9," are displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the background image during a jackpot, the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific regions 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-3D characters and 3D characters)
FIG. 11-5(B) is an explanatory diagram for comparing non-three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions with three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions.

Comparing the non-three-dimensional characters used to display the number of acquisitions and the three-dimensional characters used to notify the number of acquisitions, the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional characters is the same as the size of the area 20SHS21 expressing the characters in the line area forming the three-dimensional characters. In the case of a non-three-dimensional specific character, the area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the characters becomes the specific area 20SHI1. On the other hand, in the case of a three-dimensional specific character, the line area forming the characters includes the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the characters, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS21 expressing the characters and the outline of the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the characters located on the inner side becomes the specific area 20SHI3. Therefore, the size of the three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions is smaller than the non-three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions by the size of the area 20SHS22 that represents the depth of the characters, which is located on the inner side of the area 20SHS21 that represents the characters, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the characters is smaller.

(Modification of Acquisition Number Notification Display in the Second Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 11-6(A) is a diagram showing a first modified example of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-6(A), the specific region 20SHI4 for the specific characters "0," "4," "6," "8," and "9" among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used in the winning number notification display is displayed in "white," and when it is displayed in front of the background image during a jackpot, the background image during a jackpot cannot be seen from the specific region 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-three-dimensional characters and three-dimensional characters in Modification Example 1)
FIG. 11-6(B) is an explanatory diagram for comparing non-three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the first modified example.

In the first modified example, when comparing the non-three-dimensional characters used to display the number of acquisitions and the three-dimensional characters used to notify the number of acquisitions, the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional characters is the same as the size of the area 20SH31 expressing the characters in the line area forming the three-dimensional characters. In the non-three-dimensional specific characters, the area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the characters becomes the specific area 20SHI1. On the other hand, in the three-dimensional specific characters, the line area forming the characters includes the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the characters, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SH31 expressing the characters and the outline of the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the characters on the inner side becomes the specific area 20SHI4. Therefore, the three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions are smaller in size than the non-three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions by the size of the area 20SH32 that represents the depth of the character and is located on the inner side of the area 20SH31 that represents the character, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the character is smaller.

(Modification of Acquisition Number Notification Display in the Second Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 11-7(A) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH.

In variant 2, as shown in FIG. 11-7(A), the characters used to display the number of acquisitions are displayed in a three-color gradation in the line area that forms the characters, and are displayed in one of display modes A to G, which have different combinations of the three-color gradation.

The line region forming the character in display mode A is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper region 20SHSU being "red," the central region 20SHSC being "orange," and the lower region 20SHSD being "yellow." The line region forming the character in display mode B is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper region 20SHSU being "orange," the central region 20SHSC being "yellow," and the lower region 20SHSD being "green." The line region forming the character in display mode C is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper region 20SHSU being "yellow," the central region 20SHSC being "green," and the lower region 20SHSD being "light blue." The line region forming the character in display mode D is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper region 20SHSU being "green," the central region 20SHSC being "light blue," and the lower region 20SHSD being "blue." The area of the lines forming the characters in display mode E is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper area 20SHSU being "light blue," the center area 20SHSC being "blue," and the lower area 20SHSD being "purple." The area of the lines forming the characters in display mode F is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper area 20SHSU being "blue," the center area 20SHSC being "purple," and the lower area 20SHSD being "red." The area of the lines forming the characters in display mode G is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper area 20SHSU being "purple," the center area 20SHSC being "red," and the lower area 20SHSD being "yellow."

The image display device 5 changes the style of the characters used to display the number of acquisitions notification over time in the following order: Display style A → Display style B → Display style C → Display style D → Display style E → Display style F → Display style G → Display style A → ....

Figure 11-7 (B) shows an example of the color change that accompanies the operation of the acquisition number notification display in variant 2.

In variant 2, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), the speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes differs between when the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moving (frame-in/frame-out).

In the example shown in FIG. 11-7(B), the acquisition number notification display changes from display mode A to display mode D while moving (frame-in) from the right edge of the display area of the image display device 5 to the center of the first display area 20SH51 over 0.35 seconds. The acquisition number display then changes from display mode D to display mode G while stopped and displayed for 1 second in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. The acquisition number notification display then changes from display mode G to display mode C while moving (frame-out) from the center of the first display area 20SH51 to the left edge of the display area of the image display device 5 over 0.35 seconds.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a background image during a jackpot corresponding to a jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display an acquisition number display relating to the number of awarded prize balls in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display region 20SH51, an acquisition number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls" as an acquisition number notification display for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "kiriban", and can display an acquisition number notification display of "over 2000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls". The acquisition number display is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the display started. The characters used for the acquisition number notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display. The characters used for the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used to display the number of winnings are not visible from the specific area against the background image during a jackpot. The specific characters used to display the number of winnings notification have a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the characters than the specific characters used to display the number of winnings.

This configuration allows the winning number display and winning number notification display, including the specific characters, to be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during a jackpot. For example, when a player checks the number of winning balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the winning number display, but the winning number display is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and if the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the specific characters, there is a possibility that the specific characters will appear different from their original characters. However, by making the background image during a jackpot invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized.

The characters used to display the number of wins are three-dimensional characters. The line area that forms the three-dimensional characters includes an area that represents the characters and an area that represents the depth of the characters.

This configuration can enhance the presentation effect of the winning number notification display.

As mentioned above, the specific characters used to display the winning number notification can be seen from the specific area 20SHI3 along with the background image during the jackpot.

With this configuration, the winning number notification display is not displayed at all times during a jackpot game state like the winning number display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches the "kiriban" number. Since it is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51 and the ratio of the size of the specific area 20SHI3 to the size of the line areas 20SHS21, 20SHS22 that form the letters is small, not only can the risk of misidentifying the letters be reduced even if the background image during a jackpot is visible from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific letters be reduced, but also the presentation effect can be enhanced by making the background image during a jackpot visible from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific letters.

As mentioned above, the specific characters used to display the winning number notification in variant 1 are not visible from specific area 20SHI4 against the background image during a jackpot.

With this configuration, the winning number notification display is not displayed at all times during a jackpot game state like the winning number display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches the "kiriban" number, and is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the letters is small, so not only can the sense of incongruity be reduced even if the background image during a jackpot is not visible from the specific area of the specific letters, but by making the background image during a jackpot not visible from the specific area of the specific letters, it is possible to prevent the letters from being misinterpreted.

As described above, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display in variant example 2 are displayed with a three-color gradation in the line areas that form the characters. The image display device 5 changes the appearance of the characters used in the acquisition number notification display over time in the following order: Display appearance A → Display appearance B → Display appearance C → Display appearance D → Display appearance E → Display appearance F → Display appearance G → Display appearance A → ... The speed at which the display appearance of the acquisition number notification display changes differs between when the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moving (frame-in/frame-out).

With this configuration, the display mode changes depending on the movement speed of the acquisition number notification display, enhancing the presentation effect.

(Explanation of the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH will be described with reference to Fig. 11-8 to Fig. 11-11. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific characters used in the result display are visible in a specific area of the ending background image.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic part 20SH having such features. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Arabic numerals used in results display)
FIG. 11-8 is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used for displaying the result in the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 finishes the final round of play, it executes an ending presentation corresponding to the end of the jackpot play state. At this time, the image display device 5 displays an ending background video. In addition, while the image display device 5 is displaying the ending background video, it displays a result display announcing the total number of winning balls awarded in the jackpot play state.

The result display uses numbers to show the total number of winning balls awarded during a jackpot game, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a result display. The numbers used to display the result are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

Among the characters used in the result display, there are some that correspond to specific characters. In the third form of the characteristic part 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the specific regions of the specific characters used in the result display are displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 11-8, the specific regions 20SHI5 of the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used in the result display are displayed in a transparent display mode.

Of the characters used to display the results, numbers other than Arabic numerals to indicate the total number of winning balls awarded in a jackpot game state, and characters other than numerals to recognize that it is a result display, are also displayed in a transparent display mode in specific areas, such as the Arabic numerals shown in Figure 11-8.

(Various effects during big win game mode)
11-9 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation period of various presentations in a big win gaming state. FIG. 11-10 is a diagram showing an example of presentation operation of various presentations in a big win gaming state.

When reserved information is stored in a jackpot gaming state, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a reserved consecutive win notification that indicates that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state in accordance with the reserved information stored. For example, in a jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds in total, the presentation control CPU 120 starts a reserved consecutive win notification at timing T1 when 9 rounds of round play end and the 10th round, which is the final round, begins, as shown in Figures 11-9 and 11-10 (A) to (B).

When the reserved consecutive wins notification is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 displays an effect image of the reserved consecutive wins notification in front of the jackpot background image, which corresponds to the progress of a round of play in the jackpot game state. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(B), a "flame" effect image 20SHE is displayed as the effect image of the reserved consecutive wins notification.

In the example shown in Figure 11-10 (B), the "flame" lines of the effect image overlap the back side of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, but because the specific area is displayed in "white," the effect image cannot be seen from the specific area. Therefore, in the specific area, the "flame" lines of the effect image do not blend in with the lines that form the specific character "0," and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0."

As shown in FIG. 11-9 and FIG. 11-10(B) to (C), at the timing T2 when the final round of play ends and the ending performance begins, the performance control CPU 120 ends the pending consecutive win notification and begins the ending performance. When the ending performance begins, the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 begins displaying an ending background video at a specified brightness. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(C), an ending background video of cherry blossom petals falling from the back of the screen is displayed in the first display area 20SH51. Also, the words "Jackpot End" are displayed in front of the ending background video to indicate that the jackpot play state has ended.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 ends the pending consecutive wins notification before the ending background video starts to be displayed at timing T2. Therefore, when the ending background video is being displayed, the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive wins notification is not displayed. In other words, the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive wins notification is displayed when the ending background video is not being displayed.

The ending background video only needs to be an image displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, as shown in FIG. 11-10(D). In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(D), cherry blossom petals are fluttering across the entire screen as the ending background video.

As shown in Figures 11-9 and 11-10 (D) to (E), at time T3 when the result display begins, the performance control CPU 120 reduces the brightness of the ending background video to a specific brightness darker than a predetermined brightness, pauses the progression of the ending background video, and displays it as a still image. The performance control CPU 120 then displays the result display 20SHRE in front of the ending background video at a brightness brighter than the specific brightness of the still image of the ending background video. In the example shown in Figure 11-10 (E), the fluttering cherry blossoms stop, and the result display 20SHRE is displayed in white letters.

As mentioned above, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are displayed in a transparent manner in the specific area 20SHI5. Therefore, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE and the ending background video can be seen from the specific area 20SHI5.

The characters used in the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used in the number of wins display 20SHK, as shown in Figures 11-10 (A), (B), and (E). The result display 20SHRE only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, as shown in Figure 11-10 (E).

(The setting is hinted at in the ending background video)
FIG. 11-11 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion presentation using an ending background video.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the setting value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the probability of winning a jackpot changes by using a display result judgment table according to the setting value. The setting value has six levels from "1" to "6", with "1" being the lowest ball payout rate, and the ball payout rate increases as the value increases in the order of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". In other words, when the setting value is set to "1", the player has the lowest advantage, and the advantage increases stepwise as the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". In this embodiment, the setting values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings", and the setting values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic section 20SH is configured to be able to change the setting value, and is also configured to be able to display the above-mentioned ending background image as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value. For example, when the setting value is set low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image of cherry blossom snow falling from the back of the screen, as shown in FIG. 11-11(A). On the other hand, when the setting value is set high, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image of large amounts of cherry blossom snow falling from cherry trees in full bloom on the left and right, as shown in FIG. 11-11(B).

Note that the setting suggestion by the ending background video does not have to definitively suggest whether the setting value is set to low or high. For example, when the setting value is set to low, the ending background video shown in FIG. 11-11(B) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the setting value is set to high, the ending background video shown in FIG. 11-11(A) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate.

The ending background video may be presented in a different manner depending on whether the setting is "6," which is the most advantageous setting for the player, or not. The ending background video may be presented in a different manner depending on whether the setting is an odd number or an even number.

Here, the above-mentioned consecutive wins in the reserved lottery notification is one of several types of notification effects that predict the probability of a jackpot, but the setting suggestion effect based on the consecutive wins in the reserved lottery notification is not executed.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to the progress of a round game in the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state in at least the first display area 20SH51. Moreover, when the ending background image is not displayed, the image display device 5 can display, in the second display area 20SH52, an effect image 20SHE of a consecutive ball announcement in the reserve, which suggests that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot game state in response to the stored reserve information, on the front side of the background image during the jackpot game in the front side of the background image during the jackpot game in the front side of the second display area 20SH52. Moreover, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display area 20SH51, a result display 20SHRE that notifies the total number of prize balls that have been awarded in the jackpot game state on the front side of the ending background image. The characters used in the result display 20SHRE are characters of a larger size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK. The characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming characters is formed. The specific characters used in the win count display 20SHK are not visible from the specific area in the background video during a jackpot or the effect video 20SHRE of the pending consecutive win notice. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are visible from the specific area 20SHI5 in the ending background video.

According to this configuration, the winning number display 20SHK including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during a jackpot or the effect image 20SHE of the consecutive wins in reserve, and the result display 20SHRE including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the ending background image. For example, when a player checks the number of winning balls in a jackpot game state, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52 and may overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the consecutive wins in reserve. If the background image during a jackpot or the effect image 20SHE of the consecutive wins in reserve is visible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters may appear different from the original characters. However, by making the background image during a jackpot or the effect image 20SHE of the consecutive wins in reserve invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result display 20SHRE is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51 and does not overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the pending consecutive win notice. Therefore, by making the ending background image visible from a specific area of the specific letters, it is possible to show at least a little of the ending background image in the prominent display position of the first display area 20SH51.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set to one of multiple setting values "1" to "6" that have different jackpot winning probabilities. The image display device 5 can display an ending background image in a manner that suggests the set value that has been set. The effect image 20SHRE of the reserved consecutive win notification is one of multiple types of notification effects that predict the jackpot reliability, but does not execute a setting suggestion effect based on the reserved consecutive win notification.

With this configuration, there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect will be executed using the ending background video, which increases the significance of the ending background video being visible from the specific area 20SHI5 of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE.

As described above, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background video at a predetermined brightness. Then, at timing T3 when the image display device 5 starts displaying the result display 20SHRE, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background video at a specific brightness that is darker than the predetermined brightness, and displays the result display 20SHRE at a brightness that is brighter than the specific brightness.

This configuration can improve the visibility of the result display 20SHRE.

(Explanation regarding the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the fourth embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH will be described with reference to Figs. 11-12 to 11-16. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH, a remaining number display relating to the remaining number of ST times in a probability variable state and a remaining number notification display which notifies the predetermined number of times when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display becomes a predetermined number can be displayed. The characters used in the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display include specific characters which form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. The specific characters used in the remaining number display are not visible from the specific area against the background image during ST. The specific characters used in the remaining number notification display are visible from the specific area against the background image during ST.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH having such features. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Background art related to the fourth aspect of the characteristic portion 20SH)
11 and 12 are diagrams showing background art related to the fourth aspect of the characteristic portion 20SH.

Pachinko gaming machines are basically designed so that when comparing advantageous states for the player, such as a special state, time-saving state, or jackpot gaming state, with the normal state, the period during which the player plays in the advantageous state is longer than the period during which the player plays in the normal state.

For example, in a pachinko game machine, when the upper limit number of reserved information is stored, regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game, a shortened variation with a shorter variable display time is more likely to be executed than when the upper limit number of reserved information is not stored. And in a special state with time-saving control, the variable winning ball device changes to an open state, making it easier for winning to occur than in the normal state, so shortened variation is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and it is possible to progress the game faster than in the normal state. Therefore, the period during which play is performed in the normal state is longer than the period during which play is performed in a special state with time-saving control.

The probability variable control ends when either of the following conditions is met first after the end of the jackpot game state: a specified number of STs of special game are played, or the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot." Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become "jackpot" while the probability variable control is being performed, if the specified number of STs of special game are played, the probability variable control ends. The specified number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

In addition, by performing the time-saving control, the variable display time of the special pattern in the special pattern game is shortened compared to when the time-saving control is not performed. The time-saving control ends when either of the following conditions is met first: the special pattern game is played a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game state, or the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot." Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "jackpot" when the time-saving control is being performed, the time-saving control ends when the special pattern game has been played a predetermined number of times. The predetermined number of times is, for example, 70 times.

The set value for the number of STs and the set value for the number of time-savings may be different values.

When a pachinko game machine is controlled to a high probability state, it may display a remaining number display regarding the remaining number of ST times in the high probability state, as shown in FIG. 11-12(A). In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the remaining number display shows "30 times remaining" since there are 30 ST times remaining.

The remaining number of times display uses numbers to show the remaining number of ST times, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a remaining number of times display. The numbers used to show the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc. The remaining number of times display shown in Figure 11-12 (A) uses the characters "remaining" and "times" to make it clear that it is a remaining number of times display, and the number "30" to show the remaining number of ST times.

Some characters used to display the remaining number of times also form special regions.

When the pachinko machine is in the high probability state, as shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the ST background image corresponding to the high probability state is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device. In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the ST background image is displayed in a manner that makes it appear as if the screen is cracked. The ST background image is an image that is displayed behind the other images displayed on the image display device in the high probability state. The ST background image contains many lines that represent animation pictures and effects.

The remaining number of times display is displayed small in an edge area that does not impede the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device. When the background image during ST changes over time, the lines of the background image during ST may overlap the back of the remaining number of times display. Furthermore, when a specific character is displayed in the remaining number of times display, such as the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Figure 11-12 (A), if the lines of the image during ST overlap the back of a specific area of the specific character, the lines of the background image during ST may blend in with the lines that form the specific character, causing the specific character to appear different from its original character.

Figure 11-12 (B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Figure 11-12 (A). In the example shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), the lines of the background image during ST are superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the remaining number of plays, and the lines of the background image during ST are assimilated with the lines that form the specific character "0", so that the specific character "0" appears as the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the characters showing the remaining number of times are mistaken for characters that are different from the actual characters, the remaining number of ST times in the special probability state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the lines in the background image during ST so that the lines do not overlap with specific areas of specific characters.

The fourth form of characteristic part 20SH was made in consideration of this background, and the fourth form of characteristic part 20SH will be described below.

(Display of remaining number of times in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH)
11-13 are diagrams showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH.

In the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific region 20SHI6 of the Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times, which correspond to the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9", is displayed in a non-transparent display mode different from the display mode of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-13, the color of the lines 20SHS6 of the Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times is "black", while the specific region 20SHI6 of the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" is displayed in "white", and when it is displayed in front of the background image during ST, the background image during ST cannot be seen from the specific region 20SHI6.

In addition, the display mode of the specific region 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the character, but may be a display mode that has a high contrast with the display mode of the lines 20SHS6 that form the character to the extent that the specific region 20SHI6 and the lines 20SHS6 that form the character can be accurately distinguished.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color that has a high contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a brightness that has a low contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a brightness that has a high contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with high contrast to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with low contrast to the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a brightness with low contrast to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with low contrast to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with high contrast relative to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with low contrast relative to the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a brightness with low contrast relative to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with low contrast relative to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters.

Of the characters used to display the remaining number of times, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the remaining number of ST times, and specific characters other than numerals to recognize that they are displaying the remaining number of times, are displayed in a display mode in which the specific area is not transparent and is different from the display mode of the lines that form the characters, as in the Arabic numerals shown in Figures 11-13.

(Display of remaining number of times in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIG. 11-14 is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used for the remaining number notification display in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH.

When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays a remaining number of times notification display to notify the predetermined number of times.

The remaining number of times notification display uses numbers to display the specified number of remaining times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a specified number, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a remaining number of times notification display. The numbers used in the remaining number of times notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

The remaining number of times display is displayed in multiple different modes with different transparency, as shown in FIG. 11-14. The remaining number of times display shown in FIG. 11-14(A) is a display mode in which the line areas forming the characters of the remaining number of times display are not transparent, and the background of the characters is not visible through the line areas. The remaining number of times display shown in FIG. 11-14(B) is a display mode in which the line areas forming the characters of the remaining number of times display are transparent, and the background of the characters is visible through the line areas.

The remaining number of times notification is also displayed in three-dimensional characters. In a display mode in which the background of the characters is not visible, the line area forming the three-dimensional characters includes area 20SHS71 representing the characters and area 20SHS72A representing the depth of the three-dimensional characters. In a display mode in which the background of the characters is visible through, area 20SHS71 representing the characters is displayed through transparency, so that the area that was displayed as area 20SHS72A representing the depth of the three-dimensional characters in a display mode in which the background of the characters is not visible is displayed as area 20SHS72B representing the bottom surface of the three-dimensional characters.

Among these three-dimensional characters, there are some that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-14, the specific regions 20SHI7 of the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of plays, which correspond to the specific characters "0," "4," "6," "8," and "9," are displayed in a transparent display mode, and when they are displayed in front of the background image during ST, the background image during ST can be seen from the specific regions 20SHI7.

As shown in FIG. 11-14, the specific area 20SHI7 of the remaining number display differs when the remaining number display is displayed in a non-transparent manner and when it is displayed in a transparent manner. In the example shown in FIG. 11-14, the remaining number display is displayed in a non-transparent manner, and the area of the lines forming the characters includes the area 20SHS72A that represents the depth of the characters, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS71 that represents the characters and the outline of the area 20SHS72A that represents the depth of the characters located on the inner side of that becomes the specific area 20SHI7. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 11-14(B), the remaining number display is displayed in a transparent manner, and the area 20SHS71 that represents the characters is displayed transparently, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS72B that represents the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character becomes the specific area 20SHI7.

(Appearance of remaining number display in the fourth form of characteristic portion 20SH)
Fig. 11-15(A) is a diagram showing how the remaining number display appears in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH. Fig. 11-15(B) is an enlarged view of the part of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Fig. 11-15(A).

In the example shown in Figures 11-15 (A) and (B), the lines of the background image during ST are superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the remaining number display 20SHST, but because specific area 20SHI6 is displayed in "white," the background image during ST cannot be seen from specific area 20SHI6. Therefore, in specific area 20SHI6, it does not blend in with the lines 20SHHS2 of the background image during ST, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0."

In addition to the remaining number of times display 20SHST, the image display device 5 also displays the number of times acquired 20SHK, the right-hit display 20SHM, and the probability of winning 20SHRU to notify the player that they are in a probability of winning state. Like the remaining number of times display 20SHST, the number of times acquired 20SHK, the right-hit display 20SHM, and the probability of winning 20SHRU are also displayed small in the edge area that does not obstruct the visibility of the decorative patterns in the display area of the image display device 5.

The characters used in the number of wins display 20SHK, right-hit display 20SHM, and probability variable display 20SHRU may include characters of the same type as those used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display, and characters of a different type than those used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display. In this embodiment, the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are "numbers," "hiragana," and "kanji," as shown in FIG. 11-17. On the other hand, the probability variable display 20SHRU uses "alphabet," which is a different type of character than those used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH. The number of wins display 20SHK uses "numbers," which are the same type of characters as those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH, and "katakana," which is a different type of character from those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH. The right-hit display 20SHM uses "hiragana" and "kanji," which are the same type of characters as those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH, and "symbols," which are a different type of character from those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH.

Some characters used in the acquisition count display 20SHK, right-hit display 20SHM, and probability bonus display 20SHRU are specific characters, regardless of the type of character. The specific regions of the specific characters used in the acquisition count display 20SHK, right-hit display 20SHM, and probability bonus display 20SHRU, like the specific region 20SHI6 of the remaining number display 20SHST, are non-transparent and are displayed in a different display mode from the line 20SHS6 that forms the characters, so the background image during ST cannot be seen from the specific region 20SHI6.

(Example of the remaining number display and remaining number notification display in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Fig. 11-16 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the remaining number of times notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH. Fig. 11-17 is a diagram showing an example of the remaining number of times display and the remaining number of times notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH.

As shown in FIG. 11-17, the performance control CPU 120 displays the remaining number of times display 20SHST in the second display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 11-17(A) to (B), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the number indicating the remaining number of ST times in the remaining number of times display 20SHST each time a variable display is executed.

As shown in Figures 11-16 and 11-17 (A) to (B), when the variable display is started where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a predetermined number of times, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH, which notifies the predetermined number of times, in a non-transparent display mode. For example, when the variable display is started where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes 60, 50, 40, 30, 20, or 10, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH, which notifies the number of times, in a non-transparent display mode. As shown in Figures 11-17 (B) to (D), the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH are larger in size than the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST. In the example shown in FIG. 11-17, when the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is displayed, the number of times of winning display 20SHK is also displayed, but the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is displayed in a display area different from the display area in which the number of times of winning display 20SHK is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-16 and FIG. 11-17(B) to (C), when a first period has elapsed since the display of the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH was started, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH from a non-transparent display mode to a transparent display mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-16 and FIG. 11-17(B) to (E), when a second period has elapsed since the display mode of the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH was changed, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can perform variable display based on multiple types of variation patterns with different variable display times.

The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is a display for notifying the user of a specified number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a specified number. Therefore, if the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed across multiple variable displays, the user may misinterpret the remaining number of ST times.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to be able to end the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in one variable display, the total period of the first period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a non-transparent display mode and the second period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent display mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time of the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time.

With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 11-16, in a variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a predetermined number, regardless of the type of variable display based on the change pattern, the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH can be terminated in that one variable display.

Here, the first display region 20SH51 includes the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left," "middle," and "right" described above. Meanwhile, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in front of the identification information in at least each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first display region 20SH51. Therefore, if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the non-transparent remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, there is a possibility that the display result cannot be recognized.

In this embodiment, therefore, in order to allow the display result of the variable display to be recognized, the first period during which the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a non-transparent display mode is set to end before the timing at which the display result of the variable display of the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time is derived.

With this configuration, as shown in Figure 11-16, in a variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a predetermined number, the display result of the variable display can be easily recognized regardless of the type of variable display based on the variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-17(D), the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH is displayed when the display result of the variable display is derived, but since the display mode of the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH has changed to a transparent display mode, the identification information in the background of the characters can be seen from the area of the lines that form the characters of the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH.

In this embodiment, the change in the display mode of the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH is controlled so that the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent display mode when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. However, if a pseudo consecutive performance is executed in a variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times indicator 20SHST is a predetermined number, the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH may be displayed in a transparent display mode when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a probability variable state accompanied by time-saving control that allows the game to proceed faster than in a normal state. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a background image during ST in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display a remaining number display 20SHST relating to the remaining number of STs in the probability variable state in front of the background image during ST in the second display area 20SH52. Furthermore, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display region 20SH51, a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes a predetermined number, on the front side of the background image during ST. The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying "60" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes 60, and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying "50" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes 50, as the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes 50. The remaining number of times display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed. On the other hand, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends its display when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of display. The characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are characters of a larger size than the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST. The characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH include a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters. The specific characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST are not visible from the specific area 20SHI6 against the background image during ST. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH are visible from the specific area 20SHI7 against the background image during ST.

With this configuration, the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, which include specific characters, can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during ST. For example, when a player checks the remaining number of STs in a probability variable state, the player checks the remaining number display 20SHST, but the remaining number display 20SHST is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and if the background image during ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific characters, there is a possibility that the specific characters will appear to be different characters from the original characters. However, by making the background image during ST invisible from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. Furthermore, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is not displayed at all times like the remaining number of times display 20SHST, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to alert the player that the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST has reached a specified number, and since it is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, by making the background image during ST visible from the specific area 20SHI7 of the specific letters, it is possible to show at least a little of the background image during ST in the prominent display position of the first display area 20SH51.

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back is visible through the lines that form the characters.

This configuration allows the player to see the background image while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, so that unnecessary stress is not caused to the player.

As described above, the first display area 20SH51 includes the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. The image display device 5 can display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

This configuration allows the player to see the variable display of the decorative symbols while the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is displayed, so that unnecessary stress is not caused to the player.

Also, as described above, when the display result of the variable display is being derived and displayed, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode.

With this configuration, even if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls awarded. The image display device 5 then displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area in which the winning number display 20SHK is displayed.

This configuration can prevent the visibility of the number of wins display 20SHK from being reduced due to the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH being displayed.

In the above explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine capable of playing a game in which medals are inserted, a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 20SH)
(1) A gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (e.g., the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (e.g., the image display device 5 displays a background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.). and the like), and in the second display area, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, an amount display relating to the amount of gaming value that has been granted (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, an acquired number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls granted), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, as notification displays for notifying that the amount of gaming value granted has reached a predetermined amount, a first notification display for notifying that the amount of gaming value granted has reached a first predetermined amount and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of gaming value granted has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, at least in the first display area 20SH51, an acquired number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls granted in a jackpot gaming state As the winning number notification display 20SHKH, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the winning number notification display "over 1000" can be displayed, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", the winning number notification display "over 2000" can be displayed), the awarded amount display is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the winning number notification display 20SHK is updated every time a gaming ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state), the notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the winning number notification display 20SHKH ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the display), and the characters used in the notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used in the awarded amount display (for example, the winning number notification display 20SH the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK), the characters used for the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters), the specific characters used for the award amount display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image during a jackpot is not visible from the specific area), and the specific characters used for the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are such that the background image during a jackpot is visible from the specific area).

According to this configuration, the given amount display and the notification display including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the given amount of the gaming value given in the advantageous state, the player checks the given amount display, but the given amount display is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area, and if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters may appear different from the original characters. However, by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. In addition, the notification display is not displayed at all times in the advantageous state like the given amount display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the given amount of the gaming value given in the advantageous state reaches a specified amount, and is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area. Therefore, by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific characters, it is possible to show at least a little of the background image in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific characters may include the Arabic numerals 0, 4, 6, 8, and 9 (for example, the specific characters may include the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9").

This configuration allows the display of the amount of the grant and the notification using Arabic numerals to be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the display means may display the notification display when the award amount display is displayed (for example, the image display device 5 may display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed).

With this configuration, even when the notification display is displayed, the amount of gaming value awarded during the jackpot gaming state can be accurately ascertained from the award amount display.

(4) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (3), the display means may be capable of displaying the notification display in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 may be capable of displaying the winning number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52).

This configuration makes the notification display more noticeable to the player, and can conveniently notify the player that the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state has reached a predetermined amount.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above, the display means is capable of displaying a specific display relating to the advantageous state in front of the background image in the second area (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative pattern display 20SHZ, a round number display 20SHR, and a right-hit display 20SHM in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and the characters used in the specific display include characters of the same type as the characters used in the award amount display and the notification display, and characters of a different type from the characters used in the award amount display and the notification display, and both types of characters include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, a jackpot display The characters used in the display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hand hit display 20SHM include characters of the same type as the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and characters of different types from the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and both types of characters include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed, etc.), and the specific characters used in the specific displays are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hand hit display 20SHM are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area during a jackpot, etc.).

This configuration allows specific characters to be accurately recognized even in specific displays.

(6) The gaming machine according to the second form of the characteristic part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (e.g., the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (e.g., the image display device 5 displays a jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, and the like), in the second display area, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, an awarded amount display relating to the awarded amount of gaming value (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, an acquired number display relating to the number of prize balls awarded, and the like), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, a first alert display notifying that the awarded amount of gaming value has reached a first predetermined amount and a second alert display notifying that the awarded amount of gaming value has reached a second predetermined amount, as alert displays notifying that the awarded amount of gaming value has reached a first predetermined amount and a second alert display notifying that the awarded amount of gaming value has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, at least in the first display area 20SH51, an acquired number alert display notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state has reached a "round number" number, as alert displays notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state has reached a round number). When the number of prize balls awarded in the advantageous state reaches "1000", an acquisition number notification display of "over 1000" can be displayed, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", an acquisition number notification display of "over 2000" can be displayed), the acquisition amount display is updated every time gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquisition number display is updated every time gaming balls are paid out as prize balls in the jackpot game state), the notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the start of its display (for example, the acquisition number notification display ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of its display), and the characters used in the notification display are characters of a larger size than the characters used in the acquisition amount display (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display are characters of a larger size than the characters used in the acquisition number display). The characters used in the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines that form the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines that form the characters), the specific characters used in the award amount display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display are such that the background image during a jackpot is not visible from the specific area), and the specific characters used in the notification display have a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the characters than the specific characters used in the award amount display (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display have a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the characters than the specific characters used in the acquisition number display).

With this configuration, the award amount display and notification display including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the award amount display, but the award amount display is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area, and if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific characters, there is a possibility that the specific characters will appear different from their original characters. However, by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above, the characters used in the notification display may be three-dimensional characters (for example, the characters used in the winning number notification display may be three-dimensional characters), and the line area forming the three-dimensional characters may include an area that represents the characters and an area that represents the depth of the characters.

This configuration can enhance the dramatic effect of the notification display.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific characters used in the notification display may be configured so that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the winning count notification display may be configured so that the background image is visible from the specific area 20SHI3 during a jackpot).

With this configuration, the notification display is not displayed at all times in an advantageous state like the awarded amount display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state reaches a specified amount, and is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the letters is small, so not only can the risk of misidentifying the letters be reduced even if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific letters be reduced, but the presentation effect can be enhanced by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific letters.

(9) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific characters used in the notification display may be such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the winning count notification display in variant 1 may be such that the background image during a jackpot cannot be seen from specific area 20SHI4).

With this configuration, the winning number notification display is not displayed at all times during a jackpot game state like the winning number display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches the "kiriban" number, and is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and since the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the letters is small, not only can the sense of incongruity be reduced even if the background image is not visible from the specific area of the specific letters, but by making the background image not visible from the specific area of the specific letters, the letters can be prevented from being misidentified.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (9) above, the display means may be capable of changing the state of the notification display to a specific state (for example, the image display device 5 may be capable of displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH by stopping it in the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and when the specific period of time has elapsed since the state of the notification display changed to the specific state, the state of the notification display may be changed to a state different from the specific state (for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in to the stopping position in the first display area 20SH51, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be framed out, etc.).

This configuration can improve the presentation effect when the notification display is displayed.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10) above, the characters used in the notification display are displayed in a plurality of different colors in the line areas forming the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display in variant 2 relating to the second form of characteristic part 20SH are displayed in a three-color gradation in the line areas forming the characters), and the display means is capable of changing the combination of the plurality of colors over time (for example, the image display device 5 changes the form of the characters used in the acquisition number notification display in the following order: Display form A → Display form B → Display form C → Display form D → Display form E → Display form F). The display may be changed over time in the order of display mode E → display mode F → display mode G → display mode A → ...), and the speed at which the combination of the multiple types of colors changes when the notification display is displayed in the specific mode may be different from when it is displayed in a mode other than the specific mode (for example, the speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes may be different when the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moving (frame-in/frame-out)).

With this configuration, the display mode changes depending on the movement speed of the notification display, enhancing the dramatic effect.

(12) The gaming machine according to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state in which the game can proceed faster than the normal state (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a probability variable state with time-saving control in which the game can proceed faster than the normal state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the special state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 is equipped with a first display area 20SH5 In the second display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, a background image during ST can be displayed, etc.), and in the second display area, a variation count display relating to the number of variations in the special state can be displayed in front of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display a remaining number display 20SHST relating to the remaining number of STs in the probability variable state in front of the background image during ST in the second display area 20SH52), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, as a number notification display for notifying the number of variations when the value of the variation count display becomes a predetermined value, a first number notification display for notifying the number of variations when the value of the variation count display becomes a first predetermined value, and a second number notification display for notifying the number of variations when the value of the variation count display becomes a second predetermined value (for example, the image display device 5 can display a remaining number display 20SHST relating to the remaining number of STs in the probability variable state in front of the background image during ST in at least the first display area 20SH51, When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches a predetermined number, a remaining number of times display 20SHSTH that notifies the predetermined number of times can be displayed, such as a remaining number of times display 20SHSTH that notifies "60" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 60, and a remaining number of times display 20SHSTH that notifies "50" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 50), the variable number of times display is updated every time the variable display is executed (for example, the remaining number of times display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed), the number of times display is terminated when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of display (for example, the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of display), and characters used for the number of times display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the variable number of times display (for example, the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is The characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST are larger than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST, etc.), the characters used for the variable number of times display and the number of times notification display include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters (for example, the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH include a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters, etc.), the specific characters used for the variable number of times display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST are such that the background image during ST is not visible from the specific area 20SHI6, etc.), and the specific characters used for the number of times notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are such that the background image during ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI7, etc.).

According to this configuration, the change count display and the number of times notification display including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the change count in a special state, the change count display is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area, and if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters may appear different from the original characters. However, by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. In addition, the number of times notification display is not displayed at all times like the change count display, but is displayed only for a specific period in order to alert the player that the remaining number of times indicated by the change count display is a specified number, and since it is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area, by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific characters, it is possible to show at least a little of the background image in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

(13) In the gaming machine of (12) above, the display means can display the characters used in the remaining number of times display in a transparent manner in which the image behind the characters can be seen through the line area forming the characters (for example, the image display device 5 can display the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH in a transparent display manner in which the image behind the characters can be seen through the line area forming the characters).

This configuration allows the player to see the background image while the count notification display is displayed, preventing unnecessary stress from being caused to the player.

(14) In the gaming machine of (13) above, the first display area includes a variable display area in which the identification information is variably displayed (for example, the first display area 20SH51 includes the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right"), and the display means is capable of displaying the number of times notification display in front of the identification information in the variable display area (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in front of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R).

With this configuration, the variable display of the identification information can be seen while the count notification display is being displayed, so that unnecessary stress is not caused to the player.

(15) In the gaming machine of (14) above, when the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner, the display means displays the number of times notification display in the transparent manner (for example, when the display result of the variable display is displayed in a derived manner, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display manner, etc.).

With this configuration, even if the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner while the count notification display is being displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

(16) In any of the gaming machines (12) to (15) above, the display means is capable of displaying an amount of the gaming value that has been awarded (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an acquired number display 20SHK that indicates the number of prize balls that have been awarded), and displays the number of times notification display in a display area different from the display area in which the amount of the award display is displayed (for example, the image display device 5 displays a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area in which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed).

This configuration can prevent the visibility of the dispensed amount display from decreasing due to the number of times the notification display is displayed.

(17) The gaming machine according to the first form of the characteristic part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (e.g., the display area of the image display device 5 is , a first display area 20SH51, and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), the display means is capable of displaying a first background video corresponding to the progress of the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 displays, in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, a background image during a jackpot corresponding to the fact that the advantageous state is ending, etc.), at least in the first display area, a second background image corresponding to the fact that the advantageous state is ending (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an ending background image corresponding to the fact that the jackpot gaming state is ending, at least in the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and when the second background image is not being displayed, in the second display area, a specific suggestion image giving a suggestion regarding the progress of the game can be displayed on the front side of the first background image (for example, when the ending background image is not being displayed, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an effect image 20SHE of a consecutive win notice in a reserve that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state in accordance with the reserved information stored, on the front side of the background image during a jackpot, in the second display area 20SH52), etc.), and when the second background image is not being displayed, in the front side of the first background image, The image display device 5 is capable of displaying an amount of value awarded (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an acquired number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls awarded, in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52), and when the second background image is displayed, at least in the first display area, in front of the second background image, a result notification display that notifies the amount of gaming value awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a result display 20SHRE that notifies the total number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state, in front of the ending background image, at least in the first display area 20SH51, when an ending background image is displayed), and characters used in the result notification display are characters of a larger size than characters used in the amount of value awarded display (for example, the characters used in the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK). The characters used in the award amount display and the result notification display include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters), the specific characters used in the award amount display are such that the first background image and the previous specific suggestion image are not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image during a jackpot and the effect image 20SHRE of the pending consecutive win notice are not visible from the specific area), and the specific characters used in the result notification display are such that the second background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are such that the ending background image is visible from the specific area 20SHI5).

According to this configuration, the display of the amount of the game value provided including the specific character can be displayed in a suitable manner in relation to the first background image and the specific suggestion image, and the display of the result notification including the specific character can be displayed in a suitable manner in relation to the second background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of the game value provided in an advantageous state, the display of the amount of the game value provided checks the display of the amount of the game value provided. However, since the display of the amount of the game value provided is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area and may overlap with the specific suggestion image, if the first background image or the specific suggestion image is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may appear to be different from the original character. However, by making the background image during a jackpot and the specific suggestion image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, since the display of the result is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area and does not overlap with the specific suggestion image, by making the second background image visible from the specific area of the specific character, it is possible to show at least a little of the second background image in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

(18) The gaming machine of (17) above is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of different setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is capable of setting one of a plurality of different setting values "1" to "6" with different odds of winning a jackpot, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying the second background video in a manner suggesting the setting value set by the setting means (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an ending background video in a manner suggesting the set value), and the specific suggestion video is one of a plurality of suggestion videos that suggest the advantageous state, and does not suggest the setting value set by the setting means (for example, the effect video 20SHRE of the consecutive wins in reserve is one of a plurality of preview effects that predict the reliability of a jackpot, but the setting suggestion effect due to the consecutive wins in reserve is not executed, etc.).

With this configuration, the second background image may suggest a setting value, which increases the significance of the second background image being visible from a specific area of the specific characters used to display the result notification.

(19) In the gaming machine of (17) or (18) above, the display means starts displaying the second background video at a predetermined brightness (for example, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background video at a predetermined brightness, etc.), and at the timing when the display of the result notification display starts, the second background video is paused and displayed at a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and the result notification display is displayed at a brightness brighter than the specific brightness (for example, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background video at a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and displays the result notification display at a brightness brighter than the specific brightness, at the timing T3 when the display of the result display 20SHRE starts).

This configuration can improve the visibility of the result notification display.

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 19SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 19SH will be described with reference to Figs. 12-1 to 12-6. The image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 19SH can display an acquisition number display related to the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the big prize opening in a big win gaming state, and an expected acquisition number display related to the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the big win gaming state. The image display device 5 can also display an effect display that makes the expected acquisition number display invisible or difficult to see when an over-winning occurs. Then, the image display device 5 updates the value of the expected acquisition number display when the expected acquisition number display becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display. Meanwhile, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over-winning performance before the expected acquisition number display becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to the characteristic part 19SH having such features. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Presentation action when a win occurs during a round of play)
Fig. 12-1 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation operation when a winning occurs during a round of play. Fig. 12-2 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance of this embodiment is controlled to a jackpot gaming state as shown in Fig. 12-1 (A), it displays, as the winning number display 20SHK, a winning number display 20SHK1 relating to the number of prize balls awarded when a gaming ball enters a big prize opening in the jackpot gaming state, and a planned number of prize balls display 20SHK2 relating to the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot gaming state. In the example shown in Fig. 12-1 (A), the winning number display 20SHK is displayed in the form of a fraction, such as "135/1500," with the winning number display 20SHK1 with "135" in the numerator and the planned number of prize balls display 20SHK2 with "1500" in the denominator, separated by a central dividing line "/". In other words, the winning number display 20SHK shown in Figure 12-1 (A) indicates that the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball entered the big prize opening during a big win game state was 135 balls, and that the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded during a big win game state is 1,500 balls.

In this embodiment, the number of winnings display 20SHK is also displayed in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5, which also displays the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hit display 20SHM. In addition, the image display device 5 displays a background image during a jackpot, in which the character 20SHCA appears, in response to the progress of a round of play in the jackpot game state. Note that the background image during a jackpot is displayed on a display layer that is arranged behind the display layer in which the number of winnings display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 12-2.

When a prize ball is awarded as a result of a game ball entering the big prize opening during a big win game state, the presentation control CPU 120 updates the value of the number of winnings display 20SHK according to the presentation mode shown in Figures 12-1 (B) to (F).

When a prize ball is awarded as a result of a game ball entering the big prize opening during a big win game state, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying an effect display in a display area close to the position of the special variable prize ball device 7 that forms the big prize opening, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (B). Here, in this embodiment of the pachinko game machine 1, the special variable prize ball device 7 is located in the lower right position of the image display device 5 as seen by the player. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (B), the effect display 20SHEF that imitates a tornado is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. At this timing, the number of winnings display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the number of winnings display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF towards the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-1(C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-1(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF, which starts to be displayed at the bottom right edge of the display area, moves towards the top of the display area. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Note that even at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (D). Here, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer that is arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 12-2. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible. Note that at this timing, although the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (D).

In the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (D), the effect display 20SHEF has been moved to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, making the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible, but a portion of the acquisition number display 20SHK may be visible to the extent that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK cannot be recognized. In other words, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be difficult to see by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK.

Then, as shown in Figures 12-1 (D) to (E) and 12-2 (D) to (E), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or is difficult to see by displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a game ball enters the big prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, in the example shown in Figures 12-1 (D) to (E) and 12-2 (D) to (E), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" to "150".

Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (F). In the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (F), the display of the effect display 20SHEF has ended, making the acquisition number display 20SHK visible, and it can be confirmed that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 has been updated.

According to this presentation mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, thereby drawing attention to the effect display 20SHEF. Then, as the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or is difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible, it can be conveniently recognized that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1, which was the focus of attention, has been updated.

(Example of the performance when an over-winning occurs)
Fig. 12-3 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation operation when an over-winning occurs Fig. 12-4 is a diagram showing an example of a positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

In this embodiment of the pachinko game machine 1, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening during one round of play, the large prize opening is controlled to be closed, but in this case, a so-called over-winning may occur, in which the eleventh game ball enters the large prize opening following the tenth game ball. When an over-winning occurs, the presentation control CPU 120 updates the value of the winning number display 20SHK in a presentation mode as shown in FIG. 12-3.

When an over-winning occurs, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying an effect display in the display area close to the position of the special variable winning ball device 7 that forms the large winning hole, as shown in Figures 12-3 (A) to (B) in the same way as when the 10th winning occurs. In the example shown in Figure 12-3 (B), an effect display 20SHEF that resembles a tornado is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the winning number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the winning number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF towards the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF, which starts to be displayed at the bottom right edge of the display area, moves towards the top of the display area. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Note that even at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the presentation control CPU 120 starts an over-winning presentation to notify the user that an over-winning has occurred before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area of the winning number display 20SHK, in other words, before the effect display 20SHEF makes the winning number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), an over-winning presentation video featuring the character CHCB is displayed on the image display device 5.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance using another performance device as the over winning performance. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the performance control CPU 120 outputs an over winning sound from speakers 8L and 8R that is different from the sound that occurs when a prize is normally won, as the over winning performance. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the over winning sound "beep beep beep" is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The performance control CPU 120 can also light up the attacca lamp 9c in a different light emission pattern from the sound that occurs when a prize is normally won, as the over winning performance.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (D). Here, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer that is arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 12-4. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible. Note that at this timing, although the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (D).

In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(D), the effect display 20SHEF has been moved to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, making the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible, but a portion of the acquisition number display 20SHK may be visible to the extent that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK cannot be recognized. In other words, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be difficult to see by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK.

Then, as shown in Figures 12-3(D)-(E) and 12-4(D)-(E), the performance control CPU 120 updates the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or is difficult to see by displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK. In the example shown in Figures 12-3(D)-(E) and 12-4(D)-(E), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "150" to "165", and the value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 12-3(F). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(F), the end of the display of the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquisition count display 20SHK visible, and it can be confirmed that the values of the acquisition count display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition count display 20SHK2 have been updated.

According to this presentation mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, thereby drawing attention to the effect display 20SHEF. Then, as the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or is difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible, it can be conveniently recognized that the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2, which were the focus of attention, have been updated.

In particular, when an over-winning occurs, not only the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 but also the value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 are updated, so that the player can easily recognize that the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded in the jackpot game state has increased by the number of prize balls awarded due to the over-winning.

After the display of the effect display 20SHEF has ended, the performance control CPU 120 ends the over winning performance, as shown in FIG. 12-3(G). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(G), the display of the over winning performance image that was displayed on the image display device 5 as the over winning performance ends, and the background image during the jackpot in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed.

(Setting suggestion based on over-winning effect)
As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the setting value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the probability of winning a jackpot changes by using a display result judgment table according to the setting value. The setting value has six levels from "1" to "6", with "1" being the lowest ball payout rate, and the ball payout rate increases as the values increase in the order of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". In other words, when the setting value is set to "1", the player has the lowest advantage, and the advantage increases stepwise as the values increase in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". In this embodiment, the setting values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings", and the setting values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings".

In this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting value can be changed, and the above-mentioned over winning effect can be executed as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value. For example, when the setting value is set low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over winning effect video featuring the character CHCB on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), and outputs an over winning sound "beep beep" from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, when the setting value is set high, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over winning effect video featuring the character CHCC on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 12-5 (B), and outputs an over winning sound "beep beep" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The setting suggestion effect using the over winning effect does not have to definitively suggest whether the setting value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the setting value is a low setting, the over winning effect shown in FIG. 12-5(B) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the setting value is a high setting, the over winning effect shown in FIG. 12-5(A) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate.

The over prize presentation may be different depending on whether the setting is "6", which is the most advantageous setting for the player, or not. The over prize presentation may be different depending on whether the setting is an odd number or an even number.

(If there are rounds where the required number of prizes are not awarded and rounds where over-winning occurs)
FIG. 11-6 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation operation in a case where there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls are not won and a round in which an over-winning ball occurs in the characteristic portion 19SH.

As mentioned above, the jackpot game state will remain open until either a specified period of time has elapsed or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a specified number, whichever comes first.

In the example shown in Figures 12-6 (A) to (B), nine winning balls were won in one round of play, but 29.5 seconds passed before the number of game balls entering the big winning hole reached 10, and the first round of play ended, and the second round of play began. In this example, in response to the nine winning balls during one round of play, the winning number display 20SHK, "135/1500", is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-6 (B). Note that in this example, it will be explained that the total number of winning balls expected to be awarded in the big win play state in which 10 rounds of play are executed, is 1500.

Then, suppose that in the second round of play, the number of game balls that enter the big prize opening reaches 10, ending the second round of play, and that in the third round of play, 10 prize balls are also won. In other words, suppose that 300 prize balls are awarded in the second and third rounds of play. In this case, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435", as shown in Figure 12-6 (C).

And let us say that an over win occurs during the 3rd round of play. In that case, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF starts, and while the effect display 20SHEF is moving, the over win performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquired number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, but while the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", and the value of the expected number of acquisitions display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

And then, in each of the 4th to 10th rounds, the number of game balls that have entered the big prize slot reaches 10, and the round play ends. In that case, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500", as shown in FIG. 12-6 (G).

When all 10 rounds of play are completed, an ending presentation is executed as shown in FIG. 12-6 (H), and the result display 20SH announces that the total number of winning balls awarded during the jackpot play state is 1,500.

In this example, the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round play are played is 1500 balls, but because over-winning occurred in 3 rounds of round play, the final value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is "1515". However, because there were only 9 winning balls in 1 round of round play, the final value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is "1500" instead of "1515".

According to this embodiment, if there are rounds in which the specified number of winning balls is not won and rounds in which an over-winning occurs, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 will be less than the value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2, so by checking the final winning number display 20SHK, it is easy to see that there were rounds in which the specified number of winning balls was not won and rounds in which an over-winning occurred.

Figure 11-7 shows another example of the presentation action when there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls are not won and an over-winning ball occurs in characteristic part 19SH.

In the example shown in Figures 12-7 (A) to (B), nine winning balls were won in one round of play, but 29.5 seconds passed before the number of game balls entering the big winning hole reached 10, and the first round of play ended, and the second round of play began. In this example, in response to the nine winning balls during the first round of play, the winning number display 20SHK, "135/1500", is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-7 (B). Note that in this example, it will be explained that the total number of winning balls expected to be awarded in the big win play state in which 10 rounds of play are executed, is 1500.

Then, suppose that in the second round of play, the number of game balls that enter the big prize opening reaches 10, ending the second round of play, and that in the third round of play, 10 prize balls are also won. In other words, suppose that 300 prize balls are awarded in the second and third rounds of play. In this case, the value of the number of winning balls display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435", as shown in Figure 12-7 (C).

And let us say that an over win occurs during the 3rd round of play. In that case, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF starts, and the over win performance is executed while the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

As shown in FIG. 12-7(E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquired number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, but while the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated. As shown in FIG. 12-7(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", but the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is not updated and remains at "1500".

And then, in each of the 4th to 10th rounds, the number of game balls that have entered the big prize slot reaches 10, and the round play ends. In that case, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500", as shown in FIG. 12-7 (G).

When all 10 rounds of play are completed, an ending presentation is executed as shown in FIG. 12-7 (H), and the result display 20SH announces that the total number of winning balls awarded during the jackpot play state is 1,500.

In this example, the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round play are played is 1500 balls, but although over-winning has occurred in 3 rounds of round play, the value of the final expected number of winning balls display 20SHK2 remains "1500". However, since there were only 9 winning balls in 1 round of round play, the value of the final number of winning balls display 20SHK1 is "1500".

According to this embodiment, when there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls is not won and a round in which an over-winning ball occurs, it is possible to prevent any sense of incongruity caused by the values of the winning number display 20SHK1 and the expected winning number display 20SHK2.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 19SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can be changed between an open state in which the gaming ball can easily win a prize and a closed state in which the gaming ball cannot or has difficulty winning a prize. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a CPU 103 that can execute a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from a closed state to an open state and then changed to a closed state when it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a presentation control CPU 120 that can execute an over-winning presentation when an over-winning occurs in one round game. The image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK1, which indicates the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, and the expected winning number display 20SHK2, which indicates the total number of prize balls to be awarded in a jackpot game state. The image display device 5 can also display an effect display 20SHEF, which makes the expected winning number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see, when an over-winning occurs. The image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF. Meanwhile, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over-winning performance before the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF.

This configuration makes it possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated, compared to when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated while the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 remains visible.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with speakers 8L and 8R. The performance control CPU 120 can execute over-winning performances using the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

This configuration can enhance the presentation effect of the over-winning effect.

As described above, when a game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in a display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and moves the effect display 20SHEF to make the number of balls won display 20SHK1 and the number of balls expected to be won display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see.

With this configuration, the entry of the gaming ball into the special variable winning device 7 can be expressed by a display effect on the image display device 5, which can increase interest. In addition, the effect display 20SHEF makes it difficult or impossible to see not only the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 but also the number of wins display 20SHK1, so the feeling of discomfort can be more effectively suppressed.

As described above, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect display 20SHEF is moving, and become invisible or difficult to see when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed.

With this configuration, when the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area in which the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 automatically come into view, so that attention to the effect display 20SHEF can also draw attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 in their state before the values were updated.

As described above, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the over-winning presentation before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area in which the winning number display 20SHK1 and the expected winning number display 20SHK2 are displayed.

With this configuration, the over-winning effect can be executed to let the player know in advance that an over-winning has occurred, so it is possible to more effectively prevent a sense of discomfort from arising when the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 is updated.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set to one of several different setting values "1" to "6" that have different jackpot winning probabilities. The image display device 5 can then execute an over-winning effect in a manner that suggests the set value that has been set.

This configuration can increase attention to the over-winning effects.

As described above, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the over prize presentation after the display of the effect display 20SHEF has ended.

With this configuration, the updated value of the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 becomes visible while the over-winning effect is continuing, so the sense of discomfort caused by the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 being updated can be more effectively suppressed.

(Modifications of Characteristic Part 19SH)
The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 19SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like, the CPU 103 executes a process for when the power supply is stopped just before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this process for when the power supply is stopped, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a process for protecting the data in the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes the addition of an error detection code and a process for backing up various data. The data that is backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game, but also the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. Even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like, by executing such a process for when the power supply is stopped, the CPU 103 can continue playing the game before the power outage after the power is restored.

On the other hand, the presentation control CPU 120 does not back up the various data required to proceed with the presentation. Therefore, after the power outage is restored, the presentation control CPU 120 cannot continue the presentation based on the game information before the power outage.

For example, if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped during a round game due to an unexpected power outage or the like, the performance control CPU 120 will not execute a performance corresponding to the round game after the power outage is restored. In that case, the performance control CPU 120 will not display the number of winnings display 20SHK1 and the number of expected winnings display 20SHK2 in the round game after the power outage is restored, or will display the number of winnings display 20SHK1 and the number of expected winnings display 20SHK2 in a manner that does not display specific values such as "???/????". In addition, even if a winning occurs in a round game after the power outage is restored, the performance control CPU 120 will not display the effect display 20SHEF because it has not executed a performance corresponding to the round game by the image display device 5. On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 can identify that an over winning has occurred in one round of round game after the power outage is restored, it will not execute the over winning performance by the image display device 5, but will be able to execute the over winning performance by the speakers 8L, 8R and the attacca lamp 9c. The performance control CPU 120 can identify that an over-winning has occurred, for example, by a performance control command that notifies the user that an over-winning has occurred.

With this configuration, in a situation where the values of the number of wins display 20SHK1 and the number of expected wins display 20SHK2 cannot be confirmed after the power outage is restored, the effect display 20SHEF is not displayed to avoid any sense of incongruity, while if an over-winning occurs, this fact can be notified.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 19SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 19SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and includes a display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means that can be changed between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win a prize and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win a prize (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can be changed between an open state in which the gaming ball is easy to win a prize and a closed state in which the gaming ball is impossible or difficult to win a prize, etc.), and a lane that changes the variable winning means from the second state to the first state and then changes the variable winning means to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. The game machine is provided with a control means capable of executing a round game (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from a closed state to an open state and then changed back to the closed state when the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to a jackpot game state), a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when more than a predetermined number of game media win in the variable winning means in one of the round games (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a performance control CPU 120 capable of executing an over winning effect when an over winning occurs in one of the round games), and the display means displays the awarded game value awarded when the game media win in the variable winning means. and a second award amount display relating to the amount of gaming value to be awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 can display an acquired number display 20SHK1 relating to the number of prize balls awarded when a gaming ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, and an expected number of awards display 20SHK2 relating to the total number of prize balls to be awarded in a jackpot gaming state), and can display a specific display that makes the second award amount display invisible or difficult to see when more than the predetermined number of gaming media have won in the variable winning means (for example, the image display device 5 can display an effect display that makes the expected number of awards display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see when an over-winning occurs). the image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the effect display 20SHEF makes the expected number to be won display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see), and the specific performance execution means starts the specific performance before the second award amount display becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the specific display (the performance control CPU 120 starts an over winning performance before the effect display 20SHEF makes the expected number to be won display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see),

This configuration makes it possible to reduce discomfort when the value of the second amount of provision display is updated, compared to updating the value of the second amount of provision display while keeping the second amount of provision display visible.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, a sound output means is provided (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with speakers 8L and 8R, etc.), and the specific effect execution means is capable of executing, as the specific effect, an effect by the display means and an effect by the sound output means (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing, as an over winning effect, an effect by the image display device 5 and an effect by the speakers 8L and 8R, etc.).

This configuration can enhance the effect of specific performances.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means, the display means starts displaying the specific display in a display area close to the variable winning means, and moves the specific display to make the first award amount display and the second award amount display invisible or difficult to see (for example, when the gaming ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in a display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and moves the effect display 20SHEF to make the number of winnings display 20SHK1 and the number of expected winnings display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see, etc.).

With this configuration, the entry of the game ball into the variable winning means can be expressed by a display effect on the display means, which can increase interest. In addition, the specific display makes it impossible or difficult to see not only the second award amount display but also the first award amount display, so that the occurrence of a sense of incongruity can be more effectively suppressed.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, the first and second award amount displays are visible when the specific display is moving, and become invisible or difficult to see when the specific display reaches the display area in which the first and second award amount displays are displayed (for example, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect display 20SHEF is moving, and become invisible or difficult to see when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area in which the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, etc.).

With this configuration, when the specific display approaches the display area in which the first and second grant amount displays are displayed, the first and second grant amount displays automatically come into view, so that attention to the specific display can also draw attention to the first and second grant amount displays before their values were updated.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above, the specific effect execution means starts the specific effect before the specific display reaches the display area where the first award amount display and the second award amount display are displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the number of winnings display 20SHK1 and the number of expected winnings display 20SHK2 are displayed).

With this configuration, the player can recognize in advance that a specific presentation has been executed and that more than a predetermined number of gaming media have been won into the variable winning means, which more effectively prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when the second award amount display is updated.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above, a setting means is provided that can set one of a plurality of different setting values with different degrees of advantage to the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set one of a plurality of setting values "1" to "6" with different odds of winning a jackpot, etc.), and the specific effect execution means can execute the specific effect in a manner that suggests the setting value set by the setting means (e.g., the image display device 5 can execute an over-winning effect in a manner that suggests the set setting value, etc.).

This configuration can increase attention to specific performances.

(7) In the gaming machine of (5) above, the specific effect execution means ends the specific effect after the display of the specific display has ended (for example, the effect control CPU 120 ends the over winning effect after the display of the effect display 20SHEF has ended, etc.).

With this configuration, the updated value of the second award amount display becomes visible while the specific performance is continuing, so that the sense of discomfort caused by the second award amount display being updated can be more effectively suppressed.

(Other examples of transition to time-saving mode)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modified examples, the transition to the time-saving state is always made via the big win state or the small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbol or part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving patterns, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving patterns, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing pattern, a lottery random number for a big win pattern, a lottery random number for a small win pattern, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

These time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols, such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state. However, if a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery will be held to determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state, and no lottery will be held to determine the number of times the time-saving state will be used.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbol is the same for all setting values. However, the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern may be the timing of the winning entry into the starting hole, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number will be the winning value; if a small win pattern random number is used to hold the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value will be the winning value; if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to hold the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value will be the winning value; and in the case of a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area is set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area will be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

When the time-saving symbol is selected using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the number of times the time-saving state is displayed will not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

In addition, when drawing a lottery for the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random number values as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since the settings can affect performance other than the probability of winning.

The timing for determining the result of the lottery for the time-saving symbol may be any time after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state or when the probability is high, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is only performed in the low probability, low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the game is already in the time-saving state, it may be possible to either reset the number of times the time-saving symbol is played or not draw a lottery, as long as this is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be a number of times that is determined in advance depending on the winning value and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving pattern can be changed between the first special pattern and the second special pattern.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving periods awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

Also, a lottery may be carried out to determine the pattern for terminating the time-saving feature, and the number of times the time-saving feature is played may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving feature until the pattern for terminating the time-saving feature is displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving feature is played may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in the game state in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a prescribed number of variable displays after a jackpot, the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after a prescribed number of variable displays have been executed, the machine may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times for the time-saving limiter is updated. Also, the pattern confirmation time for the time-saving pattern may be set to a different time from the pattern confirmation times for other patterns.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications equivalent to and within the scope of the claims.

Other examples of the gaming machine of the present invention include a gaming machine that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), has a display area capable of displaying images, and is capable of displaying game-related information relating to the progress of the game (e.g., the number of reserved first special patterns, the number of reserved second special patterns, and small patterns that are smaller in the display area than the decorative patterns) in the display area (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and a storage means (e.g., a CG 16-17)。 The display device 5 has a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., shown in FIG. 16-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers, and a performance execution means (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display during performance process shown in FIG. 16-17) capable of executing a performance to display the specific image in the display area, and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area which is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (e.g., the display area of the image display device 5 is the display means includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to a jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.), the second display area is capable of displaying an amount of awarded game value in front of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an acquired number display 20SHK in front of the background image in the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and In the display area, a first notification display notifying that the amount of game value awarded has reached a first predetermined amount and a second notification display notifying that the amount of game value awarded has reached a second predetermined amount can be displayed on the front side of the background image as notification displays notifying that the amount of game value awarded has reached a predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display area 20SH51, an acquisition number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot game state has reached a "round number" number, such as an acquisition number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls", and a notification display of "over 2000" when the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls"). the display of the number of winnings is capable of displaying an acquisition number notification display, etc.), the award amount display is updated each time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquisition number display 20SHK is updated each time a gaming ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot gaming state, etc.), the notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the start of its display (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of its display, etc.), the characters used in the notification display are larger in size than the characters used in the award amount display (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.), and the characters used in the award amount display and the notification display are formed by lines forming characters. the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines is formed (e.g., the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines is formed), the specific characters used in the award amount display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (e.g., the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area), the specific characters used in the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (e.g., the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are such that the background image is visible from the specific area), and the storage means changes the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area to a first position (e.g., the image processing means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the specific image arranged on a specific display layer based on the image data from the specific image to the center of the display area of the image display device 5 if the specific image is located in the specific display layer (for example, in the case of feature portion 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5 if the specific image is located in the specific display layer) to a second position different from the first position (for example, in the case of feature portion 006SG, the upper or lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205), and the image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on a specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-23, a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to generate a displacement target image, and an image for displacement is applied to the displacement target image to generate a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance). a part that creates an image in which the images in the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R move upward and the image in the middle area 006SG005C moves downward), the effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature part 006SG) that displays the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display, and the display image of the game-related information is placed in a special display layer in which the placed image is displayed preferentially in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority).

With this configuration, the display including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image. Furthermore, a displaced specific image in which at least a portion of the specific image displayed in a specified performance is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific performance, so that the specific performance can be executed with a smaller amount of data compared to when the image data of these displaced specific images are stored exclusively. Furthermore, when the specific performance is executed, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the specific image, which would result in a decrease in visibility of the display image of the game-related information.

In other words, the background image is not visible from the specific area enclosed by the lines that form the characters, the characters used to display the notification are larger than the characters used to display the amount of granted, and the background image is visible from the specific area, so that the amount of granted is displayed in small characters that are always easy to check, while the notification can display the fact that a predetermined amount has been reached in large characters without obscuring the background image, and the specific presentation can be executed with a small amount of data, and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information can be prevented from decreasing when the specific presentation is executed. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in an arcade, makes it easy for players to grasp the amount of granted gaming value and recognize that the predetermined amount has been reached, and that can execute the specific presentation with a small amount of data without decreasing the visibility of the display image of the game-related information.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can suitably display a display including specific characters in relation to a background image, can execute a specific performance with a small amount of data, and can prevent a decrease in visibility of a display image of game-related information, there is provided a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) capable of executing variable display, which has a display area in which images can be displayed, and which has display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying display images (e.g., a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of game-related information relating to the progress of a game (e.g., the number of reserved first special figures, the number of reserved second special figures, and a small pattern with a smaller display area than a decorative pattern) in the display area, and a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area. and a display image of related information; an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) having a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 16-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing the images arranged in the plurality of display layers; and a performance execution means (e.g., a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display during performance process shown in FIG. 16-17) capable of executing a performance to display the specific image in the display area, wherein the storage means changes the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area to a first position (e.g., The image processing means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the specific image arranged on a specific display layer based on the image data from a central part of the display area of the image display device 5 in the case of the feature portion 006SG) to a second position different from the first position (for example, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5 in the case of the feature portion 006SG) (for example, a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205), and the image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on a specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-23, a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to generate a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image to generate a displacement target image displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance). The display image displayed is an image in which the images in the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R move upward and the image in the middle area 006SG005C moves downward), the effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature part 006SG) that displays the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display, and the display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority). Below, an example of the form of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 13 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 13 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 13 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 13(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, among the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that, when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 13(A).

As shown in FIG. 13(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 13(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 14, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value from 1020 to 1346 is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the previous setting value of 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a special probability state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal or time-saving, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal or time-saving. In other words, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the rate at which the variable display result is a time-saving miss is the same for all setting values, so that it is possible to prevent the setting value from making the gambling nature excessively high. Furthermore, for the time-saving misses to which a common judgment value is assigned for each setting value, the range is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to the judgment of the variable display result being a time-saving miss.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

Figure 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 15, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S90174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S90175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, characteristic part 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The gaming machine of form A1 is
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) having a display area capable of displaying an image and capable of displaying game-related information related to the progress of the game in the display area (e.g., the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, and small symbols having a smaller display area than the decorative symbols);
A storage means (e.g., a CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) having a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 16-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIGS. 16-17 );
Equipped with
The storage means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (e.g., a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205),
The image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-23, a portion for generating a displacement target image by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area, and applying a displacement image to the displacement target image to generate an image in which the images in the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R are moved upward and the image in the middle area 006SG005C is moved downward as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 during a development suggestion performance).
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the characteristic portion 006SG, a reach suggestion effect in the modified example 006SG-1, a revival effect in the modified example 006SG-2, a foresight notice effect in the modified example 006SG-3, a promotion effect in the modified example 006SG-5, a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6) that displays the displaced specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a specific performance can be executed by displacing the display position of a specific image from a first position to a second position simply by using image data for displaying a specific image in the display area and display position displacement information for displacing the display position of the specific image. Therefore, the amount of data to be stored in the memory means for executing a specific performance can be reduced compared to when a specific performance is executed using dedicated image data.

The gaming machine of aspect A2 is the gaming machine according to aspect A1,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged on a special display layer in which the arranged image is displayed in the display area with priority over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a specific effect is being executed, the display position of the game-related information does not shift along with at least a portion of the specific image, thereby preventing the game-related information from becoming difficult for the player to see when the specific effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of aspect A3 is the gaming machine according to aspect A2,
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in an area overlapping with the displacement specific image (for example, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlapping with the image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion performance),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position to become a displaced specific image, the game-related information is not displaced but is displayed overlapping the displaced specific image, so that the player can recognize the game-related information without feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of aspect A4 is the gaming machine according to aspect A2,
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in an area of the display area that does not overlap with the displacement specific image (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed in the lower part of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R during the development suggestion performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even when the specific image is displaced to the second position to become a displaced specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed so as not to overlap with the displaced specific image, so that the player can accurately recognize the game-related information.

The gaming machine of form A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A2 to A4,
The game device includes a game identifier variable display execution means (for example, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 3) capable of executing variable display of game identifiers (for example, special symbols),
The performance execution means includes:
In a first region within the display region, a variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the game identification information can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-21, in a central portion of the display region of the image display device 5, a portion in which a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of a special pattern can be executed);
In a second area in the display area that is different from the first area and smaller than the first area, a variable display of reduced identification information corresponding to the variable display of the gaming identification information can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-21, in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, a portion in which a variable display of a small symbol corresponding to the variable display of a special symbol can be executed);
The display image of the performance identification information is arranged on the specific display layer, and the visibility state changes from a first visibility state to a second visibility state which is more difficult for the player to see than the first visibility state in response to the execution of the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figures 16-21 and 16-23, the decorative symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when a development suggestion performance is executed, the decorative symbols move upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, thereby reducing visibility).
The display image of the reduced identification information is arranged on the special display layer, and the visibility state does not change from the first visibility state in response to the execution of the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 16-21 and 16-23, the small symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative symbols, when the development suggestion performance is executed, the small symbols do not move from the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, and therefore the visibility does not decrease).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the visual effect of a specific effect can be improved by changing the visual state of the effect identification information from a first visual state to a second visual state when a specific effect is executed, and since the visual state of the reduced identification information does not change from the first visual state when a specific effect is executed, a player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually checking the reduced identification information even while a specific effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of form A6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A5,
The display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T shown in FIG. 16-31) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B shown in FIG. 16-31),
The performance execution means includes:
In the specific performance, the specific image is displayed across the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-31(C), a portion that displays a decorative pattern and a background image across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B), and an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-31(D), a portion in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move toward the left and right).
When the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced, an effect image (for example, a cutting effect image 006SG005S shown in FIG. 16-31) different from the images displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area is displayed at the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the displacement of the specific image to the second position as a special effect can be more effectively recognized by the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect A7 is the gaming machine according to aspect A6,
The performance execution means is capable of displacing the first specific display area in a first direction and displacing the second specific display area in a second direction opposite to the first direction, as a displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-31(D), a portion that moves the upper area 006SG005T to the right and the lower area 006SG005B to the left, and as shown in FIG. 16-31(E), a portion that moves the upper area 006SG005T upward and the lower area 006SG005B downward).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the displacement of the specific image to the second position as a specific performance can be executed as a displacement of the first specific display area in a first direction and a displacement of the second specific display area in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction, thereby further improving the effect of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of aspect A8 is the gaming machine according to aspect A6 or A7,
The displacement amount of the first specific display area and the displacement amount of the second specific display area in the specific performance are different (for example, as shown in modified example 006SG-3, when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a pre-reading preview performance, the movement amount (displacement amount) of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is different).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can further improve the presentation effect of specific presentations.

The gaming machine of aspect A9 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects A6 to A8,
The effect image is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area rather than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than a decorative pattern or background image).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the display position of a specific image is displaced as a specific performance, the display position of the effect image is not displaced. Therefore, by contrasting the specific image with the effect image, the displacement of the display position of the specific image can be made more prominent, thereby further improving the performance effect of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of form A10 is the gaming machine of any one of forms A6 to A9,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying the effect image in a plurality of display modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-30, a portion capable of displaying the crack effect image 006SG005H in two colors, blue and red, and as shown in FIG. 16-33, a portion capable of displaying the cutting effect image 006SG005S in three colors, blue, green, and red);
The proportion of the advantageous state controlled varies depending on the display mode in which the effect image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-30, a portion in which the probability of a jackpot varies depending on the color in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 16-33, a portion in which the probability of a jackpot varies depending on the color in which the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the effect image displayed during the special presentation, thereby further improving the presentation effect of the special presentation.

The gaming machine of form A11 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A10,
The specific effect is an effect in which the specific image changes gradually (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-21, in the development suggestion effect of the characteristic part 006SG, a part in which the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R increases gradually, as shown in FIG. 16-27, in the revival effect of the modified example 006SG-2, the decorative pattern in the center gradually expands and the amount of movement of the fragments that make up the decorative pattern gradually increases, as shown in FIG. 16-35, in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5, a part in which the distortion of the decorative pattern and the background image gradually increases).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the specific image changes gradually, thereby improving the presentation effect of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A12 is the gaming machine according to aspect A11,
The specific effect is an effect in which the display position of the specific image is gradually displaced from the first position to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-21, in the development suggestion effect of the characteristic part 006SG, the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R gradually moves upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 16-27, in the revival effect of the modified example 006SG-2, the fragments constituting the decorative pattern in the middle gradually move from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the periphery of the display area, as well as the portion in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5 where the decorative pattern and the background image are gradually distorted toward the left side).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the displacement of a specific image from a first position to a second position in a specific presentation can be emphasized, thereby further increasing the interest of the presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A13 is the gaming machine according to aspect A11,
The specific image is composed of a plurality of image fragments (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-28, a portion in which a decorative pattern is composed of a plurality of fragments),
The specific performance is a performance in which the number of the displayed image pieces increases stepwise (for example, as shown in variant example 006SG-2, a part in which the number of pieces constituting the decorative pattern in the middle increases stepwise as the revival performance progresses).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the visual effect of the image pieces gradually increasing can leave a strong impression on the player of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A14 is the gaming machine according to aspect A11,
The specific effect is an effect in which the ratio of the area in which the specific image is displayed to the display area increases stepwise (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-28, the part in which the ratio of the display area of the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device 5 increases stepwise in the revival effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the ratio of the area in which the specific image is displayed to the total display area increases stepwise, so that the player's attention can be more effectively drawn to the specific effects.

The gaming machine of aspect A15 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A11 to A14,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
The storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of display position displacement information having different displacement modes of the specific image (for example, a portion in which a plurality of pieces of image data for displacement are stored in the CGROM 206);
The proportion of the specific image controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the display position displacement information the specific image is displaced based on (for example, in a variable display in a super reach variation pattern, displacement image data for sliding and moving the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R up to the third stage is used, whereas in a variable display in a normal reach variation pattern, displacement image data for sliding and moving the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R up to the first or second stage is used, so that the proportion of the specific image controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the manner in which the specific image changes during the specific presentation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A11 to A15,
The plurality of pieces of display position displacement information include first display position change information in which the specific image changes from a first state to a second state different from the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-21, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach, the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage), and second display position change information in which the specific image does not change from the first state to the second state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-22, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a normal reach, the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage or the second stage).
The first display position change information and the second display position change information have a common change part for changing the specific image from the first aspect to the second aspect by the image processing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-21 and FIG. 16-22, in a case where displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are slid and moved to the third stage is used, and in a case where displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are slid and moved to the first stage is used, the difference between ... The portions where the images in the left region 006SG005C and the right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage are common between the case where displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C and the right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage is used and the case where displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C and the right region 006SG005R slide to the second stage is used,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the process in which the specific image changes from the first state to the second state as a specific effect, thereby further increasing the interest in the specific effect.

The gaming machine of aspect A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A16,
the display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area,
The performance execution means includes:
In the specific performance, the specific image is displayed across the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-31(C), a portion that displays a decorative pattern and a background image across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B), and an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-31(D), a portion in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move toward the left and right).
After the displaced specific image is displayed, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can be displaced (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-31(D) and FIG. 16-31(E), after the upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left, the boundary between the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is further moved upward and downward, respectively).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, after the displaced specific image is displayed, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is further displaced, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the specific presentation and increasing interest in the presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A18 is the gaming machine according to aspect A17,
The boundary between the first specific display region and the second specific display region is displaceable in a direction different from that of at least one of the multiple display regions including the first specific display region and the second specific display region (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-31(D) and FIG. 16-31(E), the upper region 006SG005T moves toward the right and the lower region 006SG005B moves toward the left, but the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific presentation can be further enhanced by the synergistic effect of the displacement of the multiple display areas and the displacement of the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area.

The gaming machine of aspect A19 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A18,
At least in the specific display layer, images can be arranged across an area corresponding to the display area and outside the area corresponding to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-39, when performing a promotion performance, a decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, and a part of the background image is arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a displaced specific image is displayed in the display area as a specific effect, the risk of an inappropriate display being performed in the display area can be reduced.
In addition, in variant example 006SG-5 of the present invention, when executing a promotion performance (specific performance), an example is given of form A in which an image for the promotion performance is created by applying a displacement image to the entire image to be displaced that has been enlarged so that its left-right width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of the image to be displaced to which the displacement image is applied is limited to only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5, in other words, it is not necessary to displace the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

The gaming machine of aspect A20 is the gaming machine of aspect A19,
The effect execution means is capable of enlarging the image displayed in the display area during a period in which the specific image is displaced from the first position to the second position as the specific effect (for example, a part that gradually enlarges a decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area according to the progress of the promotion effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display in the display area during the process leading up to the display of the displaced specific image, while maintaining the effect of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of form A21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A20,
the display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying the specific image across the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific performance, and displaying an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-31(D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, with the upper area 006SG005T moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B moving to the left).
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are different (for example, as shown in modified example 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the special effects can be performed without giving the player a sense of incongruity, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A22 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A20,
the display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying the specific image across the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific performance, and displaying an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-31(D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, with the upper area 006SG005T moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B moving to the left).
When the displaced specific image is displayed in the display area, at least a part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are the same (for example, as shown in modified example 006SG-3, at least a part of the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after being moved to the right and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after being moved to the left are in common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to add an element of surprise to the specific presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect A23 is the gaming machine according to aspect A21 or A22,
A part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the specific image is displayed is not displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the displaced specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in variant example 006SG-3, a part of the image displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is not displayed as an image displayed across the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left as a pre-reading preview performance).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can further increase the interest in the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of form A24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A23,
The display means is capable of displaying a stereoscopic image composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-44, a portion in which a naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5′ is capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video) composed of a right-eye image (R image) and a left-eye image (L image));
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute a stereoscopic effect that displays the stereoscopic image (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-45(B), a part in which a variable display preview effect can be displayed in a stereoscopic image),
When the specific performance is executed, a non-stereoscopic image is displayed as the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-45 (D), when a development suggestion performance is executed, an image displayed as the development suggestion performance is displayed as a planar image).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the stereoscopic presentation can increase the player's interest, and since a displaced specific image is not displayed as a stereoscopic image in the specific presentation, the specific presentation can be implemented in an optimal manner.

The gaming machine of aspect A25 is the gaming machine according to aspect A24,
the right-eye image and the left-eye image are arranged on a stereoscopic display layer in which arranged images are preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a specific performance is executed, a stereoscopic performance can be executed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect A26 is the gaming machine according to aspect A24 or A25,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the stereoscopic performance as an introduction performance of the specific performance during a period prior to the execution period of the specific performance during variable display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the execution of the stereoscopic effect allows the player to be aware in advance that a specific effect will be executed, thereby further improving the presentation effect of the specific effect.

As shown in FIG. 16-1, the performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, and the like. In the performance control board 12, the performance control CPU 120 operates according to a program stored in the built-in ROM 121, and receives performance control commands via the input circuit 260. Based on the performance control commands, the performance control CPU 120 also performs processing to cause the display control unit (VDP (video display processor)) 123 to perform display control of the image display device 5, such as generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 16-1, the display control unit 123 constitutes a display control circuit together with a CGROM 205 in which data such as characters (image data of people, animals, letters, figures, symbols, etc., also called CG data) and decorative patterns, background images, a first interface image 006SG005I and a second interface image 006SG005J including small patterns for displaying a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D that identifiably displays the number of reserved first special patterns as game-related information in this feature unit 006SG, and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U that identifiably displays the number of reserved second special patterns, and an SDRAM 210 (synchronous DRAM) used as a VRAM (video RAM) area are stored.

The performance control CPU 120 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to read out the necessary data from the CGROM 205 in which the image data is stored according to the received performance control command. The CGROM 205 is a ROM for storing in advance the character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, the image data of people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative designs), and background images. Note that the CGROM 205 in this characteristic unit 006SG also stores a plurality of displacement image data for displacing the positions of the pixels constituting the displacement target image to other positions by applying the data to the displacement target image described later. The display control unit 123 reads out the image data from the CGROM 205 according to the command of the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 then executes display control based on the read image data.

The display control unit 123 is an integrated circuit equipped with a system register 202 in which various settings of the display control unit 123 are stored, an attribute register 203 in which attributes (parameters used when drawing characters, data specifying the character drawing order, number of colors, zoom ratio, palette number, coordinates, etc.) are stored, a drawing control unit 206 that controls drawing of images in a drawing area of the VRAM area described later, a data transfer control unit 211 that controls the transfer of CG data stored in the CGROM 205 to the VRAM area, a display control unit 213 that outputs video signals (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) and synchronization signals for displaying image data stored in a display image creation area of the VRAM area described later, and a DA converter 214 that converts the video signal output from the display control unit 213 into an analog signal and outputs it to the image display device 5.

The display control unit 123 includes a system bus and a CG bus, which are connected to the performance control CPU 120 via a CPU interface 201, and to an image processing DSP 264 to which an infrared camera 60 is connected. The CG bus is further connected to a CGROM 205 via a CG bus interface 204. A system register 202 is connected to the system bus, and an attribute register 203 is connected to the CG bus, allowing the performance control CPU 120 to access the system register 202 and the attribute register 203.

The drawing control unit 206, data transfer control unit 211, and display control unit 213 are also connected to the system bus, and are able to access the system register 202. The drawing control unit 206 and data transfer control unit 211 are also connected to the CG bus, and are able to access the CG ROM 205 and attribute register 203.

A VRAM bus is also provided inside the display control unit 123, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 210 via a VRAM bus interface 209. The drawing control unit 206, the data transfer control unit 211, and the display control unit 213 are connected to the VRAM bus, and the VRAM area of the SDRAM 210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

The system registers 202 include a system control register that stores commands for initial settings, drawing, data transfer, etc., an interrupt control register that stores commands for outputting interrupt signals (described later), a drawing register that stores the drawing area in the VRAM area and the area where palette data is placed, a data transfer register that stores the source address and destination address when transferring data, and a display register that stores the display image creation area in the VRAM area.

The CPU interface 201 outputs a V-blank interrupt signal to the performance control CPU 120 at the start of each V-blank (image update period), and also outputs various other interrupt signals to the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 213 performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this characteristic part 006SG, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and in the next V blank, it is switched to the display image creation area, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

In particular, as shown in Figures 16-2(a) and 16-2(b), this characteristic section 006SG generates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers. The VRAM area includes a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area (see Figure 16-5). Note that each layer has the concept of upper, middle, and lower, and the higher the layer image, the higher the display priority is set on the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image, the lower the display priority is set on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 16-5 (A) and 16-5 (B), the VRAM area contains a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of layer 1, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of layer 2, and a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of layer 3. The VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images, which will be described later, and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is an area where an image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (composite) to create a displacement target image, and where a displacement image (described later) is applied to the displacement target image to create a displacement image.

The display image creation area is an area in which an image obtained by superimposing (compositing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area, or an image obtained by superimposing (compositing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area, is created as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

The image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is set to the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) on the image display device 5, the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to the image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area on the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to the image with the lowest display priority (display priority: low) on the image display device 5.

In other words, Layer 1 is the top layer with the highest image display priority, Layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than Layer 1, and Layer 3 is the bottom layer with the lowest image display priority.

As shown in Figures 16-2 (b) and 16-5 (B), the layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area in which a first interface image 006SG005I including a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D that identifiably displays the first reserved memory number of special patterns and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U that identifiably displays the second reserved memory number of special patterns is drawn in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5 to display these images, and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern that has a smaller display area than the decorative pattern is drawn in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 where the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the background image is drawn to display the background image across the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this characteristic part 006SG, it is possible to generate an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 by superimposing the image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), the image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and the image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area (layer 3 image). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J) are displayed as the topmost image in the image display device 5 because they have the highest display priority, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area (decorative design) is displayed as the middle image in the image display device 5 because it has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (background image) is displayed as the lowest image in the image display device 5 because it has the lowest display priority.

In this characteristic section 006SG, the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area are set to a transparency of 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently in the display area of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

Next, we will explain the method of displacing the image to be displaced in this characteristic part 006SG. As shown in FIG. 16-3 (A), the image for displacement to be applied to the image to be displaced has multiple pixels having red component values (R values) and green component values (G values) arranged therein. These R values and G values each have a value in the range of 1 to 256.

Taking pixel A as an example, the display control unit 123 identifies the position of pixel X to be displaced from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image based on the R and G values of pixel A. Specifically, if the R value of pixel A is between 1 and 127, the display control unit 123 identifies the position moved from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image in the negative direction (leftward) of the X axis as the coordinate (position) of pixel X in the X axis direction, and if the R value of pixel A is between 129 and 256, the display control unit 123 identifies the position moved from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image in the positive direction (rightward) of the X axis as the coordinate of pixel X in the X axis direction. The amount of movement in the X axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is the difference from 128, which is the median R value.

If the G value of pixel A is between 1 and 127, the position moved in the negative direction (downward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the image to be displaced is identified as the Y coordinate of pixel X, and if the G value of pixel A is between 129 and 256, the position moved in the positive direction (upward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the image to be displaced is identified as the Y coordinate (position) of pixel X. Note that the amount of movement in the Y axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the image to be displaced is the difference from 128, which is the median G value.

Then, once the position of pixel X in the displacement target image has been identified, pixel X is designated as the pixel to be displayed at a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image. That is, pixel X is displaced to a position corresponding to pixel A. In other words, in this feature part 006SG, by individually adjusting the R value and G value of pixel A, it is possible to displace any pixel X to a position corresponding to pixel A, and by adjusting the R value and G value of pixel A to the same value, it is also possible to displace a specific pixel X that is the same distance away from the position corresponding to pixel A to a position corresponding to pixel A.

The display control unit 123 executes the above process for multiple pixels. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-3 (B), the displacement image is composed of multiple regions (displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, displacement image d) with different R and G values, and each region is applied to the displacement target image to generate a displacement image.

For example, as shown in Fig. 16-4(A) to Fig. 16-4(C), the following regions are provided that make up the displacement image: displacement image a with an R value of 128 and a G value of any one of 1 to 127; displacement image b with an R value of 128 and a G value of any one of 129 to 256; displacement image c with an R value of any one of 1 to 127 and a G value of 128; and displacement image d with an R value of any one of 129 to 256 and a G value of 128; and the image of the triple circle is the image to be displaced.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 16-4(D), for displacement image a, the range in the displacement target image that is moved downward by the difference in G value from the corresponding position in displacement image a is specified as the display range in the displacement image. Also, as shown in FIG. 16-4(E), for displacement image b, the range in the displacement target image that is moved upward by the difference in G value from the corresponding position in displacement image b is specified as the display range in the displacement image. Also, as shown in FIG. 16-4(F), for displacement image c, the range in the displacement target image that is moved left by the difference in R value from the corresponding position in displacement image c is specified as the display range in the displacement image. Also, as shown in FIG. 16-4(G), for displacement image d, the range in the displacement target image that is moved right by the difference in R value from the corresponding position in displacement image d is specified as the display range in the displacement image.

As described above, by displacing the specified range from the image to be displaced to the positions of images a, b, c, and d for displacement using the R and G values of images a, b, c, and d for displacement, a displacement image such as that shown in Figure 16-4 (H) is generated.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, the boundaries between displacement images a, b, c, and d are clearly defined by setting either the R value or the G value of each of displacement images a, b, c, and d to a fixed value, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to generate a gradation-like image as a displacement image by gradually varying the R value and G value of the pixels near each boundary between displacement images a, b, c, and d.

Figure 16-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature section 006SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 16-6 (A) is just an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 16-6(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the result of the determination of which of several types of jackpot type should be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot", as shown in FIG. 16-6 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determined result.

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening big win state and the high-speed opening big win state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 16-6(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls having entered each winning slot, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 16-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 16-7, in this feature section 006SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 16-8 shows an example of the configuration of a special chart display result judgment table stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 006SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature section 006SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 006SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in a probability variable state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature part 006SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature part 006SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 16-9 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature unit 006SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 006SG will be explained using FIG. 16-9 (B). In this feature section 006SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of a jackpot game state of a special jackpot A to a special jackpot C will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the special jackpots A to C, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which jackpot game states occur consecutively without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 006SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 16-9(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" to control to a jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to the high opening control accompanying the time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 16-9(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 16-10 shows the variation patterns in this feature section 006SG. In this feature section 006SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", respectively, and for the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that, in this feature section 006SG, one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this feature section 006SG, two types of fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of super reach fluctuation patterns or only one type may be provided.

The Super Reach fluctuation patterns in this feature part 006SG include Super Reach α fluctuation patterns in which the variable display results in a jackpot (PB1-2) and a miss (PA2-2), and Super Reach β fluctuation patterns in which the variable display results in a jackpot (PB1-3) and a miss (PA2-3).

As shown in Figure 16-10, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this feature part 006SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the probability of a jackpot increasing. Therefore, in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

In particular, the special chart change time of the Super Reach β change pattern is set to be longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach α change pattern. In other words, the Super Reach β change pattern is set to have a higher chance of the variable display result becoming a "jackpot" than the Super Reach α change pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, as described below, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may first be determined from these random number values for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

The normal reach variation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and super reach variation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) in this feature section 006 are also variation patterns that execute a development suggestion effect to a super reach reach effect after a reach is established during the variable display. In the normal reach variation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1), the variable display result is displayed after the development suggestion effect is executed without developing into a super reach reach effect, while in the super reach variation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), the super reach reach effect is executed after the development suggestion effect is executed.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, the normal reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) are exemplified as examples of a form in which a development suggestion effect to a super reach reach effect is executed after a reach is established during variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and between the normal reach fluctuation patterns and the super reach fluctuation patterns, a fluctuation pattern in which a development suggestion effect is not executed may be set.In addition, when a development suggestion effect is executed, the rate of development to a super reach reach effect may be set higher than when a development suggestion effect is not executed.

Figure 16-11 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature part 006SG. In this feature part 006SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-11, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table.

Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 35%, and PB1-3 at a rate of 60%.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the same jackpot variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Multiple jackpot variation pattern determination tables with different determination rates for any of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 may be provided, and the variation pattern may be determined using different jackpot variation pattern determination tables depending on the type of jackpot. In this way, a variation pattern that is easily determined for each type of jackpot can be created, so that the player can pay attention to which variation pattern's variable display has resulted in the variable display result being a jackpot, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%; PA2-1 at a rate of 40%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%; PA2-1 at a rate of 30%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%; PA2-1 at a rate of 20%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, PA1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%; PA2-1 at a rate of 20%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 006SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable chart being 3 or 4, or on the time-saving state, is high, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 006SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special chart reserve memory section, a second special chart reserve memory section, a regular chart reserve memory section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, a game control counter setting section, and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the type of big win, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates the reserved number with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reserved data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit stores reserved information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit associates the game balls with reserved numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 16-1 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, for example, a performance control data storage area. The performance control data storage area shown in Figure 16-15 (A) has a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The performance control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to performance operation states, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 006SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer is stored in a specified area of the performance control buffer setting section. The start winning time receiving command buffer has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. The start winning time receiving command buffer also has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command) and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Figure 16-12 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 6 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 16-12, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 006SGS141, it is sufficient to read the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and judge whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; N), the reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 006SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 006SGS144), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 006SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141, and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 006SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special chart reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 006SGS147).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "1" (step 006SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the special pattern display result judgment table shown in FIG. 16-8 is selected and set as a table to be used to determine whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006SGS150a). In addition, in this step 006SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability is low and the probability flag is off, if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected in step 006SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability), so in the processing of step 006SGS150a, whether or not to set the special chart display result as a "jackpot" is determined using different judgment data (judgment values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state, so that when the game state is a high probability state, it is judged (determined) as a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150a; Y), the game control flag setting unit sets the jackpot flag to ON (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 16-9 (A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot type the jackpot type should be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 006SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as the variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state or a high probability state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006SGS155). As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot" corresponding to a non-high probability jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is a "high probability A" corresponding to a high probability jackpot A, it can be set to "1", if it is a "high probability B" corresponding to a high probability jackpot B, it can be set to "2", and if it is a "high probability C" corresponding to a high probability jackpot C, it can be set to "3".

After step 006SGS155 is completed, or if it is determined in step 006SGS150a that the game is not a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150a; N), a fixed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set to the on state) and the determined jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in accordance with the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being a "miss," a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if it is determined in step 006SGS150a that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot," if the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "high probability jackpot A," a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot B," a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot," a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C," a special symbol showing the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are merely examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 006SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Figure 16-13 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of Figure 6 as the fluctuation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in Figure 16-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161; Y), the CPU 103 selects and sets the fluctuation pattern determination table for the jackpot (step 006SGS164).

If the judgment in step 006SGS161 indicates that the jackpot flag is not set to the ON state (step 006SGS161; N), the game control flag setting unit judges whether the time-saving flag is set to the ON state to judge whether the game state is in a special state or a time-saving state and time-saving control is being performed (step 006SGS168). Then, if the time-saving flag is set to the ON state (step 006SGS168; Y), the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns (step 006SGS169).

On the other hand, when time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not on (step 006SGS168; N), the number of reserved memories of variable special charts is identified, for example by reading the stored value of a reserved memory number counter for variable special charts provided in the game control counter setting unit, and it is determined whether the identified reserved memory number of variable special charts is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), the loss variable pattern determination table A is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 006SGS171).

In addition, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 3 (step 006SGS172).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 3 (step 006SGS172; Y), the loss variable pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 006SGS173).

Also, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 4 (step 006SGS172; N), the program selects and sets the miss variable pattern determination table C as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable pattern (step 006SGS174), and proceeds to step 006SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 006SGS164, step 006SGS169, step 006SGS171, step 006SGS173, and step 006SGS174, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of several types by referring to the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special win fluctuation pattern determination table, or miss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in a fluctuation random number buffer (step 006SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, step 006SGS175 determines the variation pattern, and determines whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to "reach." In other words, step 006SGS170 includes a process for determining whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to a "reach" state when the variable display result is a "miss."

After the variation pattern is determined in step 006SGS175, settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so that either a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value (step 006SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 006SGS176, settings are made to send various commands for when the special pattern starts to change (step 006SGS177). For example, when the special pattern change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sequentially sends the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The CPU 103 stores the setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first change start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, second variable display start command, variable pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, and second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the processing of step 006SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the result of the determination of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 006SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result). After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation processing (step 006SGS179), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS177, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variable pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game state designation command, a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily, and for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command.

Figure 16-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S112 to end the change of the special symbol, and controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop displaying the stopped symbol (step 006SGS180). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the CPU 103 controls to send a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to turn them off (step 006SGS184) if they are turned on, and sets the performance control board 12 to send a hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), a hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), or a hit start 4 designation command (non-probability variable jackpot) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 006SGS185).

The CPU 103 then performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, the jackpot display timer is set to a value equivalent to the jackpot display time (the time for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 006SGS187). Also, the number of times the jackpot opening counter has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or a variable jackpot A, 5 times for a variable jackpot B, and 2 times for a variable jackpot C) is set (step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 006SGS189), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), in step 006SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving counter value is "0." If the time-saving counter value is "0" (step 006SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 006SGS190; N), that is, if the time-saving count is remaining and the game is in a high base state, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" or not (step 006SGS193). If it is not "0" (step 006SGS193; N), the program proceeds to step 006SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS193; Y), the program clears the time-saving flag to turn it off in order to end the time-saving control (step 006SGS194), sets the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low probability low base state) corresponding to the state of the probability flag or the time-saving flag (step 006SGS195), and then proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern, and then the special pattern stop processing is terminated.

Figure 16-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of Figure 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 006SGS202), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS203). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the variable jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS207), the time-saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS208), the time-saving counter is set to "0" (step 006SGS209), and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), steps 006SGS211 and 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end command is sent according to the type of jackpot (step 006SGS214). Then, after sending a game state command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the ON-state probability flag and time-saving flag (step 006SGS215), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of special patterns (step 006SGS216).

Next, the operation of the performance control CPU 120 will be described. Figure 16-16 is a part of the flowchart of the performance control process shown in Figure 15. In the performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 executes the above-mentioned advance notice setting process (step S161), then executes a background image change process (step 006SG162) to change the background image displayed on the image display device 5, and executes one of the processes from step S170 to step S175.

As a background image change process, for example, the performance control CPU 120 decides to change the background image displayed on the image display device 5 at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%) at the start of the variable display (the timing at which the performance control process process is executed with the performance control process flag value set to 1), and starts displaying a new background image on the image display device 5 in response to this decision. In other words, in this feature section 006SG, when any of a number of background images is displayed on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is variable displayed and a performance corresponding to the variable display is executed.

In addition, in the background image change process, when the game state changes (for example, when the game state changes from the normal state to the jackpot game state, from the jackpot game state to the special state or the time-saving state, or from the special state or the time-saving state to the jackpot state or the normal state), the presentation control CPU 120 may be able to display a background image corresponding to the new game state on the image display device 5.

Figure 16-17 is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the variable display during performance processing of the performance control process. In the variable display during performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 decrements by 1 the values of the process timer corresponding to the process table selected by the performance control CPU 120 in accordance with the fluctuation pattern in the variable display start setting processing, the variable display time timer set by the performance control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting processing, and the variable display control timer (step 006SGS901, step 006SGS902, step 006SGS903).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the process timer has timed out (step 006SGS906). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 006SGS907). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 006SGS908). In addition, the control state for the performance device (performance component) is changed based on the contents of the next process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 006SGS909). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 006SGS910).

Next, it is checked whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921; Y), the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to create image data for the next display screen for the left, center, and right decorative patterns (screens that should be displayed 30 ms after the previous display switch of the decorative patterns) (step 006SGS922). The performance control CPU 120 also determines whether the variable display is a variable display of a normal reach or super reach variable pattern (step 066SGS923).

If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach variation pattern (step 066SGS923; N), proceed to step 006SGS927. If the variable display is a normal reach or super reach variable display (step 006SGS923; Y), it is further determined whether the display image processing flag described below is on (step 006SGS924).

If the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS924; Y), proceed to step 006SGS926. If the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS924; N), the process checks the contents of the process data being executed to determine whether it is the timing to start suggesting the development of the Super Reach to a Reach performance (step 006SGS925). If it is not the timing to start suggesting the development of the Super Reach to a Reach performance (step 006SGS925; N), proceed to step 006SGS927. If it is the timing to start suggesting the development of the Super Reach to a Reach performance (step 006SGS925; Y), proceed to step 006SGS926.

In step 006SGS926, the performance control CPU 120 executes a display image processing process to process (displace) a portion of the image to be displayed on the image display device 5, and then proceeds to step 006SGS927.

In step 006SGS927, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to execute a process of synthesizing (superimposing) the images created in the above-mentioned steps 006SGS922 and 006SGS921 in the display image creation area of the VRAM 209. Then, the variable display control timer is reset (step 006SGS928). In this way, variable display control of the decorative pattern is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on an image in which an image such as the set background image is superimposed on an image based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the background image, character image, decorative pattern, etc. in the changing decorative pattern are displayed in the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 16-19, the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 006SG is a part of the background image, a first interface image 006SG005I, a second interface image 006SG005J, and a decorative pattern, the positions of which have been adjusted in advance so as to be displayed in the display area. In particular, the background image in this characteristic part 006SG is drawn as an image longer in the left-right and up-down directions than the display area of the image display device 5, and the display area of the image display device 5 displays the center part of the background image in the left-right direction. In other words, in this characteristic part 006SG, at least the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area for drawing and arranging the background image are areas for drawing and arranging an image that is longer in the up-down and left-right dimensions than the display area of the image display device 5, and the display area of the image display device 5 displays only the part of the image that corresponds to the display area.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, an example is shown in which the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area are areas for drawing and arranging images whose vertical and horizontal width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. The layer 3 image drawing area and the displacement image creation area may be areas for drawing and arranging images whose vertical and horizontal width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5, while the display image creation area may be an image for drawing and arranging images whose vertical and horizontal width dimensions are the same as the display area of the image display device 5. In this case, the background image can be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 by arranging only the parts of the image (background image) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area or the displacement image creation area that correspond to the display area of the image display device 5 in the display image creation area.

The performance control CPU 120 also checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 006SGS929). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that a pattern confirmation command has been received is on (step 006SGS930; Y), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern confirmation command is received, the control shifts to one that stops the fluctuation. Therefore, even if a fluctuation pattern specification command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards or the like is received, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be ended when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the variable display of the special pattern ends).

Figure 16-18 is a flow chart showing the display image processing (step 006SGS926) during the variable display performance processing shown in Figure 16-17. In the display image processing, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the display image processing flag is on or not (step 006SGS941). If the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS941; N), it determines whether the variable display being executed is a variable display due to a Super Reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS942). If the variable display being executed is a variable display due to a Super Reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS942; Y), it selects the displacement image data for successful development to the Super Reach performance (for announcing the execution of the Super Reach performance) and proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS943).

The displacement image data in this characteristic part 006SG is data in which displacement images to be applied to the displacement target image (in the case of this characteristic part 006SG, an image obtained by superimposing an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area (an image arranged in the displacement image creation area)) are arranged in chronological order.

In addition, if the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of a normal reach (step 006SGS942; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines at a predetermined ratio whether to select the displacement image data A for failed development of a super reach performance or the displacement image data B for failed development of a super reach performance as the displacement image data for failed development of a super reach performance (for notifying of non-execution of a super reach performance) (step 006SGS944). For example, the selection of the displacement image data A for failed development of a super reach performance may be determined at a ratio of 50%, and the selection of the displacement image data B for failed development of a super reach performance may be determined at a ratio of 50%.

Note that, in this feature section 006SG, an example is given of a form in which two displacement image data can be selected as the displacement image data for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance: displacement image data A for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance and displacement image data B for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be three or more displacement image data that can be selected as the displacement image data for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the selection of the displacement image data A for the failed development of the super reach performance has been decided in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945). If the selection of the displacement image data A for the failed development of the super reach performance has been decided in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945; Y), the displacement image data A for the failed development of the super reach performance is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS946). If the selection of the displacement image data B for the failed development of the super reach performance has been decided (step 006SGS945; N), the displacement image data B for the failed development of the super reach performance is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS947).

In step 006SGS948, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the display image processing flag. Then, it selects the first displacement image from the selected displacement image data (step 006SGS949) and proceeds to step 006SGS951.

Also, if the display image processing flag is on in step 006SGS941 (step 006SGS941; Y), the performance control CPU 120 selects the next displacement image from the selected displacement image data and proceeds to step 006SGS951 (step 006SGS950).

In step 006SGS951, the performance control CPU 120 executes a displacement image drawing process. In this displacement image drawing process, the performance control CPU 120 creates a displacement target image by, for example, synthesizing (superimposing) an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area shown in FIG. 16-5 in the displacement image creation area, and executes a process of creating a displacement image by applying the displacement image selected in step 006SGS949 or step 006SGS950 to the image.

After executing the displacement image drawing process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952). Whether the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image can be determined, for example, by whether the displacement image selected in step 006SGS950 is the last displacement image in the displacement image data.

If the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; Y), the display image processing flag is turned off and the display image processing process is terminated (step 006SGS953); if the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is not the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; N), the display image processing process is terminated without going through step 006SGS953.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display of the decorative symbols in this characteristic section 006SG will be described with reference to Figs. 16-20 to 16-23. First, as shown in Figs. 16-20(A) and 16-20(B), in this characteristic section 006SG, the display mode of the decorative symbols displayed on the image display device 5 differs depending on the game state. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 16-20(A), when the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state), a normal state decorative symbol combining a character image and a numerical image is displayed as the decorative symbol. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 16-20(B), when the game state is the time-saving state (low probability low base state or high probability high base state), a time-saving state decorative symbol consisting of only a numerical image is displayed as the decorative symbol.

In the variable display with the Super Reach variation pattern, first, as shown in Figures 16-21 (A) and 16-21 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging in a reach combination, and then a middle decorative symbol with a different numerical value from the left and right decorative symbols stops swinging. Next, a development suggestion performance is executed. In the development suggestion performance, as shown in Figure 16-21 (C), the display area displayed on the image display device 5 excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is divided into a left area 006SG005L including the left decorative symbol, a middle area 006SG005C including the middle decorative symbol, and a right area 006SG005R including the right decorative symbol. Then, as shown in Figures 16-21(C) to 16-21(E), the image displayed in middle area 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and background image contained in middle area 006SG005C) slides downward in stages, causing a development notification pattern (the pattern labeled "Development!" shown in Figures 16-21(C) to 16-21(E)) to move from above toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5, indicating that the development will progress to a Super Reach reach performance.

The development notification pattern in this feature part 006SG is a pattern that is displayed only when the development suggestion effect is being executed, and is not displayed during the execution period of other effects during the variable display.

In addition, as the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C slides downward, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (the left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R (the right decorative pattern and background image) slide upward.

The amount of sliding movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R increases as you progress through the first stage shown in Figure 16-21 (C), the second stage shown in Figure 16-21 (D), and the third stage shown in Figure 16-21 (E).

Then, when the third stage of sliding of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is completed, the development notification symbol moves to the center of the display area of the image display device 5 (the center of the middle area 006SG005C), and the development of the Super Reach into a Reach performance is announced.

On the other hand, in a variable display with a normal reach variation pattern, first, as shown in Figures 16-22 (A) and 16-22 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging in a reach combination, and then a middle decorative symbol with a different numerical value from the left and right decorative symbols stops swinging. Next, a development suggestion performance is executed. As a development suggestion performance, as shown in Figure 16-22 (C), the display area displayed on the image display device 5 excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is divided into a left area 006SG005L including the left decorative symbol, a middle area 006SG005C including the middle decorative symbol, and a right area 006SG005R including the right decorative symbol. Then, as shown in Figures 16-22(C) to 16-22(E), the image displayed in middle area 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and background image contained in middle area 006SG005C) slides downward in stages, causing the development notification pattern, which notifies the player that the game will develop into a Super Reach reach performance, to move from above toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, as the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C slides downward, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (the left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R (the right decorative pattern and background image) slide upward.

The amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R increases as it progresses through the first stage shown in FIG. 16-22(C) and the second stage shown in FIG. 16-22(D).

However, in the variable display of the normal reach, after the first stage of sliding movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R has been executed, or after the second stage of sliding movement has been executed, as shown in FIG. 16-22(E), the development suggestion performance ends without the third stage of sliding movement being executed, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in FIG. 16-22(B), and the decorative patterns and small patterns stop in a combination indicating a miss.

As shown in Figs. 16-21(C) to 16-21(E), in the characteristic portion 006SG, the sliding movement amount of each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R increases as the stages progress, but the present invention is not limited to this. The sliding movement amount of each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R may decrease as the stages progress, or the movement amount may increase or decrease only in one of the first to third stages.

In addition, in this characteristic section 006SG, an example is given of a form in which each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R can be slid up to three levels as a development suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of levels by which each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R can be slid as a development suggestion effect may be two levels or less or four levels or more.

As shown in Figures 16-21(C) to 16-21(E), in this characteristic part 006SG, the sliding direction of the image displayed in the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R is exemplified as being opposite to that of the image displayed in the middle region 006SG005C, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sliding direction of the image displayed in the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R may be the same as that of the image displayed in the middle region 006SG005C.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, an example has been given of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 for development suggestion effects when the game state is normal (low probability low base state), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may also be displaced for development suggestion effects when the game state is a time-saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state).

As shown in Fig. 16-23(A) to Fig. 16-23(E), the development suggestion performance in this characteristic part 006SG is such that the first interface image 006SG005I including the first pending memory display area 006SG005D and the second pending memory display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, a decorative pattern including the development notification pattern described above is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a background image is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In other words, as shown in Figures 16-21 and 16-22, in both the case of variable display of the normal reach variation pattern and the case of variable display of the super reach variation pattern, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are images drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and are therefore asymmetrical in displacement. For this reason, while the decorative symbols move upward or downward as a development suggestion performance, reducing visibility to the player, the first interface image 006SG005I remains displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and the second interface image 006SG005J remains displayed at the top right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J does not decrease.

As shown in Figures 16-21 and 16-22, in the variable display in the Super Reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the third stage, while in the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the first or second stage. Here, as mentioned above, the variable display in the Super Reach variation pattern is set to a higher rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state than the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, so in this feature part 006SG, the rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion performance.

In addition, in the development suggestion presentation of this feature part 006SG, the left area 006SG005L contains a left decorative pattern, the middle area 006SG005C contains a middle decorative pattern, and the right area 006SG005R contains a right decorative pattern, and these left, middle, and right decorative patterns, including the characters and numbers, slide along without being separated, preventing the left, middle, and right decorative patterns from being separated, which reduces the interest of the development suggestion presentation.

Note that, in this characteristic section 006SG, an example is shown in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R are moved upward or downward, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one or two of the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R may be moved upward or downward.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic section 006SG, specific effects that displace the display positions of the decorative symbols and background images (development suggestion effects in characteristic section 006SG, reach suggestion effects in variant 006SG-1, revival effects in variant 006SG-2, foresight notice effects in variant 006SG-3, promotion effects in variant 006SG-5, and temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects in variant 006SG-6) can be executed simply by using image data for displaying the decorative symbols and background images and displacement image data for displacing the display positions of these decorative symbols and background images, so the amount of data stored in the CGROM 205 can be reduced compared to when these specific effects are executed using dedicated data.

In particular, since this feature section 006SG is capable of displaying multiple images as background images on the image display device 5, it would normally be necessary to store in advance in CGROM 205 a presentation pattern for a specific presentation depending on when each background image is displayed or the variable display mode. However, with this feature section 006SG, the image displayed on the image display device 5 can be instantly displaced simply by using data for the displacement image, so the amount of data stored in CGROM 205 can be reduced. In addition, in this characteristic section 006SG, as game-related information, a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D capable of identifying the number of reserved first special symbols, a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U capable of identifying the number of reserved second special symbols, and a small pattern with a smaller display area than the decorative pattern are displayed on the image display device 5 are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as game-related information, a launch promotion display that prompts the player to launch (launch) the game ball toward the big winning opening or gate 41 because the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability change state, or a fourth pattern that can identify that a variable display is being executed, etc. may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 16-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority. In other words, they are asymmetric images for image displacement in the development suggestion performance in this feature part 006SG. Therefore, their display positions do not shift with the images in the left area 006SG005L, right area 006SG005R, and middle area 006SG005C, which are the objects of displacement, and it is possible to prevent game-related information, such as the number of reserved special symbols and the variable display of small symbols, from being difficult for the player to see when the development suggestion performance is being executed.

Furthermore, of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlapping with the image of the right area 006SG005R which slides upward during the development suggestion performance, but since the display position of the second interface image 006SG005J itself does not displace, the player can recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the second interface image 006SG005J without feeling any discomfort. On the other hand, the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R during the development suggestion performance, so the player can accurately recognize the first reserved memory display area 006SG005D, which identifiably displays the first reserved memory number in the first interface image 006SG005I, and the second reserved memory display area 006SG005U, which identifiably displays the second reserved memory number in a manner that allows the player to accurately recognize the first reserved memory number in the first interface image 006SG005I, without being affected by the displacement (slide movement) of the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R.

Also, as shown in Figures 16-21 and 16-23, the decorative symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when a development suggestion effect is being performed, the decorative symbols move upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, thereby reducing visibility and improving the presentation effect of the development suggestion effect. Furthermore, the small symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and when a development suggestion effect is being performed, unlike the decorative symbols, they do not move from the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, so visibility does not decrease, and the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by viewing the small symbols even when a development suggestion effect is being performed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 16-21, the development suggestion effect of this feature part 006SG gradually increases the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R, improving the presentation effect of the development suggestion effect while emphasizing the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R at each stage, thereby further improving the presentation effect.

As shown in Figures 16-21 and 16-22, in the variable display in the super reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the third stage, while in the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the first or second stage. Therefore, the proportion of the jackpot game state controlled varies depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion presentation. This allows the player to focus on the number of stages of movement of the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R in the development suggestion presentation, thereby increasing the presentation interest of the development suggestion presentation.

As shown in Figs. 16-21 and 16-22, when using displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and when using displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage, the parts in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage are common, and the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage, When using displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage, the part in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage is the same as when using displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the number of stages, etc., that the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage as a development suggestion presentation, thereby further increasing the interest of the development suggestion presentation.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 16-24 and 16-25 as modified example 006SG-1, a reach suggestion effect that suggests that a reach will occur during the variable display may be executed as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced.

The presentation mode of the reach suggestion presentation will be explained based on Figures 16-24 and 16-25. First, in the variable display with the variable pattern of normal reach or super reach, as shown in Figures 16-24(A) to 16-24(C), an action image such as a character acts on the left decorative pattern just before the left decorative pattern stops, causing the left decorative pattern to stop. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the left decorative pattern is displayed distorted.

Next, as shown in Figures 16-24(D) to 16-24(F), just before the right decorative symbol stops, an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative symbol, causing the right decorative symbol to stop and reach a winning state. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the right decorative symbol is displayed distorted.

On the other hand, in a variable display with a non-reach variation pattern, as shown in Figures 16-25(A) to 16-25(C), an action image such as a character acts on the left decorative pattern just before the left decorative pattern stops, causing the left decorative pattern to stop. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the left decorative pattern is displayed distorted.

Next, as shown in Figures 16-25(D) to 16-25(F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative pattern just before the right decorative pattern stops, but the number of patterns that do not result in a reach combination stops as the right decorative pattern. At this time, the right decorative pattern stops and a reach is reached. At this time, the part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the right decorative pattern is displayed without distortion.

As shown in Fig. 16-26(A) to Fig. 16-26(F), the reach indication performance in this modified example 006SG-1 is such that the first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved memory display area 006SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, an action image is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-1 has a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing images below the layer 3 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, an example is given of a form in which a reach suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display of the non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible not to execute a reach suggestion effect in some of the variable displays of the non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, an example of a reach suggestion effect is shown in which an action image such as a character acts on the left and right decorative symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a reach suggestion effect in a variable display of a non-reach variation pattern, it is also possible to provide a case in which the action image acts on the decorative symbols only once (only acting on the left decorative symbol).

Moreover, in this modified example 006SG-1, an example is given of an action image such as a character acting on a decorative pattern as a reach suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple action images can be displayed as reach suggestion effects, and the rate at which a reach occurs can be varied depending on which action image acts on the decorative pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, in the case where an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect but the reach does not occur, an example is given in which the decorative pattern that acted and the part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern are not distorted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative pattern that the action image acted on and the part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern may always be distorted regardless of whether the reach occurs or not.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, when an action image such as a character is used as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative pattern affected by the action image and a part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern are distorted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character is used as a reach suggestion effect, only one of the decorative pattern affected by the action image and the part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern may be distorted.

In addition, in the characteristic section 213SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a Super Reach into a Reach effect is exemplified as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 16-27 and 16-28 as modified example 006SG-2, a revival effect in which decorative symbols that were once displayed as a losing combination are changed to a winning combination may be executed as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced.

The presentation mode of the revival presentation will be explained based on Fig. 16-27 and Fig. 16-28. First, when the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in Fig. 16-27 (A), the variable display result is suggested to be a miss as a reach presentation of a normal reach or super reach, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in a swinging manner in a reach miss combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-27(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlapping the decorative pattern in the middle, and the decorative pattern in the middle is split into multiple fragments along the crack effect image 006SG005H as a first-stage crack. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-27(C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are enlarged and displayed from the state shown in FIG. 16-27(B) as a second-stage crack, and each fragment moves so as to diffuse from the center of the image display device 5 in different directions.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 16-27(D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each piece are further enlarged and displayed from the state shown in Figure 16-27(C) as a third stage crack, and each piece moves to spread out further.

Then, as the fourth stage of cracking, an image of the fragments of the decorative pattern inside scattering and scattering is displayed, after which a new decorative pattern indicating a jackpot is displayed as the decorative pattern inside, and the variable display stops.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in Figure 16-28 (A), after the reach effect of a normal reach or super reach suggests that the variable display result is a miss, the decorative patterns are displayed in a swaying manner in a reach miss combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-28(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlapping the decorative pattern in the middle, and the decorative pattern in the middle is split into multiple pieces along the crack effect image 006SG005H as a first-stage crack. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-28(C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each piece are enlarged and displayed from the state shown in FIG. 16-28(B) as a second-stage crack, and each piece moves so as to diffuse from the center of the image display device 5 in different directions.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 16-28(D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each piece are further enlarged and displayed from the state shown in Figure 16-28(C) as a third stage crack, and each piece moves to spread out further.

However, in a variable display where the variable display result is a miss, after the first stage crack is executed, after the second stage crack is executed, or after the third stage crack is executed, the fourth stage crack is not executed, the revival performance ends, the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in Figure 16-28 (A), and the decorative pattern and small pattern stop in a combination that indicates a miss.

As shown in Figures 16-29(A) to 16-29(F), the revival performance in this modified example 006SG-2 involves drawing a first interface image 006SG005I including a first pending memory display area 006SG005D and a second pending memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, drawing a crack effect image 006SG005H in the layer 2 image drawing area, and drawing a decorative pattern in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, a layer 4 image drawing area is arranged in the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-2 for drawing images lower than the layer 3 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created from the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image (an image in which the decorative pattern inside is split into multiple pieces and each piece is displayed as if it is diffusing).

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In particular, in this modified example 006SG-2, the decorative pattern inside gradually expands as a revival effect. In other words, in the revival effect, the proportion of the display area of the decorative pattern inside to the display area of the image display device 5 increases gradually, so that the gradual expansion of the decorative pattern inside makes it possible to more effectively draw the player's attention to the revival effect.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, a form in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is superimposed on the decorative pattern in the middle as a revival performance is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple display modes of the crack effect image 006SG005H may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot may be varied depending on which display mode the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed in.

For example, as shown in FIG. 16-30, blue and red are set as the display colors for the crack effect image 006SG005H, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 20% of the time when the revival performance is executed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 80% of the time when the revival performance is executed. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 80% of the time when the revival performance is executed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 20% of the time when the revival performance is executed.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, two colors, red and blue, are used as the display colors for the crack effect image 006SG005H, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more colors may be used as the display colors for the crack effect image 006SG005H.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, an example is given of a form in which a revival effect is executed when the game state is in a time-saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a revival effect may also be executed when the game state is in a normal state (low probability low base state).

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, as shown in FIG. 16-28, the decorative pattern in the revival performance is composed of multiple fragments, and these fragments are moved in stages from the center to the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5 while maintaining the number of fragments as the revival performance progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiple fragments that make up the decorative pattern in the middle may increase in stages as the revival performance progresses. In this way, the visual effect of the number of fragments that make up the decorative pattern in the middle increasing as the revival performance progresses makes a strong impression of the revival performance on the player.

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a Super Reach into a Reach effect is exemplified as an effect that displaces the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 16-31 as modified example 006SG-3, an effect that displaces the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be a look-ahead preview effect that suggests from a variable display several times ago that a variable display will be executed in the variable pattern of a Super Reach in the reserved memory, or that a variable display that results in a jackpot will be executed.

The performance mode of the pre-reading preview performance will be explained based on FIG. 16-31. First, in a state where there are multiple reserved memories, as shown in FIG. 16-31(A) and FIG. 16-31(B), the variable display in progress stops with a combination of decorative symbols that is a miss. Next, as shown in FIG. 16-31(C) and FIG. 16-31(D), when the next variable display starts, in the display area of the image display device 5, the cutting effect image 006SG005S that crosses the display area from left to right is displayed overlapping with the decorative symbols and background image. Then, the display area displayed on the image display device 5, excluding the first interface image 006SG005I, is divided into a lower area 006SG005B below including the decorative symbols and part of the background image and an upper area 006SG005T above including the remaining decorative symbols and background image, with the cutting effect image 006SG005S as the boundary. In other words, the boundary between the lower area 006SG005B and the upper area 006SG005T above is hidden from the player by the cutting effect image 006SG005S.

As shown in Figures 16-31(D) to 16-31(E), the lower region 006SG005B simultaneously slides left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and the upper region 006SG005T simultaneously slides right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S. The lower region 006SG005B, which has slid left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, then slides downward, while the upper region 006SG005T, which has slid right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, further slides upward. At this time, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed moving to follow the boundary on both the lower region 006SG005B side and the upper region 006SG005T side.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-31(E) and FIG. 16-31(F), in the display area of the image display device 5, the display of a black image begins with the downward sliding movement of the lower area 006SG005B and the upward sliding movement of the upper area 006SG005T. The display area of the black image expands as the downward sliding movement of the lower area 006SG005B and the upward sliding movement of the upper area 006SG005T progresses, and when the lower area 006SG005B and the upper area 006SG005T have completed moving out of the display area, the display area appears in a so-called blacked-out state in which only the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are displayed.

After this, when the blackout ends, a new background image and decorative pattern will begin to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. This pre-reading preview performance will be repeated until the variable display of the outer pre-reading target begins.

As shown in Fig. 16-32(A) to Fig. 16-32(F), the preview performance in this modified example 006SG-3 is such that the first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved memory display area 006SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-3 has a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing images below the layer 3 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing images even lower. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a black image (blackout image) is drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image including a lower area 006SG005B and an upper area 006SG005T is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

As described above, in this modified example 006SG-3, in the look-ahead preview performance as a specific performance of the present invention, as shown in Figures 16-31 (C) and 16-31 (D), decorative patterns and background images are displayed across the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B, the upper region 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower region 006SG005B moves to the left, and a cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed at the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B, so that the player can more effectively recognize the left and right lateral movement of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B as the look-ahead preview performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and positioned in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and background image, so even if the display positions of the upper area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B are displaced, the display position of the cutting effect image 006SG005S does not displace. Therefore, by comparing the upper area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B with the cutting effect image 006SG005S, the displacement of the display positions of the upper area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B can be made more prominent, further improving the presentation effect of the pre-reading preview presentation.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 16-31 (D) and 16-31 (E), by moving the upper region 006SG005T to the right and the lower region 006SG005B to the left, and then further moving the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B upward and downward, respectively, the presentation effect of the pre-reading preview presentation can be further enhanced and the presentation interest can be increased. In particular, as shown in Figures 16-31 (D) and 16-31 (E), the upper region 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower region 006SG005B moves to the left, but the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction, so the synergistic effect of the displacement (movement) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B and the displacement (movement) of the boundary can further enhance the performance of the pre-reading preview.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, the movement direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is an up-down direction different from the right side, which is the movement direction of the upper region 006SG005T, and the left side, which is the movement direction of the lower region 006SG005B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the movement direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is different from either the movement direction of the upper region 006SG005T or the movement direction of the lower region 006SG005B.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, a cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 as a pre-reading preview performance, and the lower area 006SG005B and upper area 006SG005T divided along the cutting effect image 006SG005S are displayed movingly. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple display modes of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result in the pre-reading target variable display becomes a jackpot may be varied depending on which display mode the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in.

For example, as shown in FIG. 16-33, three colors, blue, green, and red, are set as the display colors for the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and if the variable display result of the pre-read target is a jackpot, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue 10% of the time, in green 30% of the time, and in red 60% of the time. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the pre-read target is a miss, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue 60% of the time, in green 30% of the time, and in red 10% of the time.

By doing this, the player can be drawn to the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S that is displayed during the preview performance, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect of the preview performance.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, three colors, blue, green, and red, are used as the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be two colors or four or more colors. In addition, the rate at which the variable display result of the pre-read target becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate) may be different depending on aspects other than color, such as the shape and size of the cutting effect image 006SG005S and the number of cutting effect images 006SG005S displayed.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, an example is given of the image displayed on the image display device 5 being divided into two areas along the cutting effect image 006SG005S as a pre-reading preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be divided into three or more areas as a pre-reading preview performance. In this case, the effect of the pre-reading preview performance may be improved by varying the direction in which each area slides.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, an example is shown in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved as a pre-reading preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the area that moves as a pre-reading preview performance may be only one of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, decorative patterns and background images are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, and the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after being moved to the right is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after being moved to the left. Therefore, even if the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B, so that the pre-reading preview performance can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, an example is shown in which the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left may be the same. In this way, an element of surprise can be added to the pre-reading preview performance, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in Figures 16-31 (C) and 16-31 (D), the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is the same as the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left as the look-ahead preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a part of the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead preview performance does not have to be displayed as the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left as the look-ahead preview performance. In this way, the performance interest of the look-ahead preview performance can be increased.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a look-ahead preview performance (in Figure 16-31 (D) the upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left, and in Figure 16-31 (E) the upper area 006SG005T is moved upward and the lower area 006SG005B is moved downward), the amount of movement (displacement) of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a look-ahead preview performance, the amount of movement (displacement) of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B may be different. In this way, by varying the amount of movement of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, which move in opposite directions as part of the look-ahead preview performance, the effect of the look-ahead preview performance can be further improved.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in FIG. 16-33, an example is given in which the rate at which the variable display result of the pre-read target becomes a jackpot is varied depending on the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 16-34 as modified example 006SG-4, the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be changed each time the variable display is executed. In this case, the rate at which the variable display result of the pre-read target becomes a jackpot (expected jackpot rate) may be varied depending on the final display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S and the change pattern of the display color.

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, an example of a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of a Super Reach to a Reach effect was given as an example of an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 16-35 as modified example 006SG-5, as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, a promotion effect (also called a re-draw effect) may be executed in which decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot type such as a non-variable jackpot or a 2-round variable jackpot with a small number of rounds during the variable display, and then the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner in a state where they are aligned in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the final combination of decorative patterns that stops indicates the jackpot type.

The presentation mode of the promotion presentation will be explained based on Fig. 16-35. First, the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as a normal reach or super reach presentation, and then, as shown in Fig. 16-35(A), after the end of these reach presentations, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot type that is relatively less advantageous to the player, such as a non-variable jackpot or a two-round variable jackpot (in the example shown in Fig. 16-35(A), the combination is the even number "2" that indicates a non-variable jackpot).

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-35(B), during the remaining period of the variable display, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are displayed variably at a uniform speed as a promotion effect, including combinations of decorative symbols for other jackpot types, such as 2-round special jackpot, 5-round special jackpot, and 10-round special jackpot.

While the promotion effect is being performed, as shown in Figures 16-35(C) and 16-35(D), the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left in two stages.

If the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot type indicated by the combination of decorative symbols displayed first (see FIG. 16-35(A)), the decorative symbols will stop with that jackpot type combination (a sure-win combination in the example shown in FIG. 16-35(E)) after the first or second stage distortion of the promotion effect. On the other hand, if the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is the same as the jackpot type indicated by the combination of decorative symbols displayed first, the decorative symbols will stop with that jackpot type combination (a non- sure-win combination in the example shown in FIG. 16-35(F)) after the first stage distortion of the promotion effect.

In addition, the "degree of advantage to the player" between the types of jackpots in this modified example 006SG-5 refers to whether or not the jackpot is controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot play ends, the number of variable display times that are controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot play ends, and the number of rounds in the jackpot play.

As shown in Figures 16-36(A) to 16-36(E), the promotion effect in this modified example 006SG-5 involves drawing a first interface image 006SG005I including a first pending memory display area 006SG005D and a second pending memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, drawing a decorative pattern in the layer 2 image drawing area, and drawing a background image in the layer 3 image drawing area.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image is applied to the displacement target image to create a displacement image in which the vertical center is distorted toward the left.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is an image that is longer in the left-right and up-down width directions than the display area of the image display device 5, as in the characteristic part 006SG (see FIG. 16-19). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 16-37, the left-right dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 may be the same as the left-right dimension of the display area of the image display device 5.

In this case, when the promotion effect is executed as described above, as shown in Figures 16-38(A) to 16-38(C), when the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left as a promotion effect, a non-image display area in which no image is displayed is formed on the right side of the display area.

In this case, when the horizontal dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the horizontal dimension of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 16-37, as shown in FIG. 16-39(A) to FIG. 16-39(D), when performing the promotion effect, the decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, or the displacement target image (background image and decorative pattern) created in the displacement image creation area is enlarged, thereby placing a part of the background image outside the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, even if the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left side as a promotion effect by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image, the background image arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5 due to the enlargement is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, thereby reducing the risk of inappropriate display on the image display device 5, such as the formation of the above-mentioned non-display area.

In addition, in FIG. 16-39, an example is shown in which both the background image and the decorative pattern are enlarged to prevent the formation of a non-image area where no image is displayed on the right side of the display area when the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left as a promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the background image may be enlarged to prevent the formation of a non-image area.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, when a promotion effect is executed, an image for the promotion effect is created by applying a displacement image to the entire image to be displaced that has been enlarged so that its left-right dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of the image to be displaced to which the displacement image is applied is limited to only the portion of the image to be displaced that corresponds to the display area of the image display device 5, that is, it is not necessary to displace the image to the extent that it is outside the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, in the case where the horizontal dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the horizontal dimension of the display area of the image display device 5, when the promotion performance is executed, the decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged to prevent the formation of a non-image part during the execution of the promotion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area may be enlarged in stages according to the progress of the promotion performance (according to the increase in the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5). In this way, the sense of incongruity caused by the decorative pattern and background image being suddenly enlarged and displayed on the image display device 5 can be reduced, so that it is possible to prevent an inappropriate display such as the display of a non-image part on the image display device 5 in the process of increasing the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 while maintaining the performance effect of the promotion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 006SG, an example was given of a form in which a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of the reach effect of the super reach during variable display can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pseudo consecutive effect including a temporary stop of the decorative pattern and re-variable display can be executed during variable display, and the rate at which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (the probability of a jackpot) can be varied depending on the number of times the pseudo consecutive effect is executed.

In particular, in a variable display that executes such pseudo consecutive effects, it may be possible to execute a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the decorative pattern will temporarily stop just before the timing of the decorative pattern's temporary stop, or a temporary stop notification effect that notifies the user of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern when the decorative pattern has temporarily stopped.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, when a promotion effect is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged, and part of the display image is arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5, thereby preventing the formation of a non-display area during the execution of the promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image larger in size than the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of modified example 006SG-5, the left and right dimensions are at least longer than the left and right dimensions of the display area of the image display device 5) may be stored in advance in CGROM 205 as an image for the promotion effect, and the image may be drawn and arranged in the displacement image creation area or display image creation area to prevent the formation of a non-display area during the execution of the promotion effect.

Furthermore, in this modified example 006SG-5, when a promotion performance is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged, and a part of the display image is arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5, thereby preventing the formation of a non-display image area during the execution of the promotion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a promotion performance is executed, an image (non-display image) different from the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 may be arranged adjacent to the display image in a position outside the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of this modified example 006SG-5, the right outer side of the display area of the image display device 5) in the display image creation area. In this way, when a promotion performance is executed, the display image and the non-display image are arranged adjacent to each other across the display area and non-display area of the image display device 5, so that a part of the non-display image is displayed instead of the non-display image area.

In the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 16-40 to 16-42 as modified example 006SG-6, these tentative stop suggestion effects and tentative stop notification effects may be executed as effects in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced.

The presentation mode of the tentative stop suggestion presentation will be explained with reference to FIG. 16-40. First, as shown in FIG. 16-40(A), when a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, the left and right decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) and a reach is reached. After that, as a tentative stop suggestion presentation, a pseudo consecutive symbol (the symbol displayed as "NEXT"), which is part of the decorative symbol, moves from the top to the bottom. At this time, the image display device 5 displays a ripple effect image 006SG005P converging from the periphery of the display area to the center of the display area, and the image around the ripple effect image 006SG005P (the left and right decorative symbols and the background image) is displayed distorted.

If the variable display is a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance (a variable display in which the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop), as shown in FIG. 16-40(B), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, and a ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display that does not execute a pseudo consecutive performance (a variable display in which the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop), as shown in FIG. 16-40(C), the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop, but move downward in the display area of the image display device 5 and become invisible, and a symbol indicating that the variable display result is a miss is displayed as a decorative symbol inside.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-6, as shown in FIG. 16-40, a form is exemplified in which a ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5 to suggest that the decorative pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) will temporarily stop, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes for the ripple effect image 006SG005P may be provided, and the rate at which the decorative pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) temporarily stops may be varied depending on which display mode the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed in as a pseudo consecutive suggestion performance.

For example, in FIG. 16-40, two ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed (double display) as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, but as shown in FIG. 16-41, it is possible to provide a case where only one ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, and the rate at which the decorative pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) temporarily stops can be varied according to the number of ripple effect images 006SG005P displayed in the pseudo consecutive effect.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-6, the pseudo consecutive pattern is displayed as part of the decorative pattern, in other words, the pseudo consecutive pattern is displayed as part of the variable display even during periods other than the pseudo consecutive performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive pattern may be a pattern different from the decorative pattern and a special pattern that is displayed only during the pseudo consecutive performance.

As shown in Figures 16-42(A) and 16-42(B), after the temporary stop indication effect is executed and the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed diffusing from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to the periphery of the display area, and the image around the ripple effect image 006SG005P (the decorative symbols on the left and right and the background image) is displayed distorted.

As shown in Figures 16-43(A) to 16-43(F), the temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects in this modified example 006SG-6 are as follows: a first interface image 006SG005I including a first pending memory display area 006SG005D and a second pending memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area; a ripple effect image 006SG005P is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area; and a decorative pattern including a pseudo consecutive pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, a layer 4 image drawing area is arranged in the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-6 for drawing images below the layer 3 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created using the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image (decorative pattern and background image distorted by ripple effect image 006SG005P) is created by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006GS, an example was given of a form in which a performance image is displayed using an image display device 5 capable of displaying only planar images, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 16-44 and 16-45 as modified example 006SG-7, a performance image may be displayed using a display device capable of displaying stereoscopic images.

Modification 006SG-7 will be described below. Note that in the characteristic part 006SG and the modification described above, an example is given of a form in which a display device such as an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electroluminescence) capable of displaying planar images (2D images) is used as the image display device 5, but the feature of this modification 006SG-7 is that, as shown in FIG. 16-44, a naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' is used that allows the player to view stereoscopic images with the naked eye using a parallax barrier method, making it possible to display stereoscopic images (3D images) in addition to planar images (2D images) as various images.

As shown in FIG. 16-44, the naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' of this modified example 006SG-7 has a structure including an image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image), a backlight 006SG901 that irradiates planar light from the rear of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 toward the front, and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 that is provided on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 with a predetermined distance from the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900.

The parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is a relatively optically transparent liquid crystal panel that allows for a parallax barrier image display state in which a parallax barrier image is displayed, which has vertically striped black sections that act as shutters to prevent the right eye image (R image) displayed in the vertically long stripes on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 from being seen by the left eye of the player and the left eye image (L image) from being seen by the right eye of the player, and transparent sections that allow the right eye image to be seen by the right eye of the player and the left eye image to be seen by the left eye of the player, and a transparent display state in which all pixels are transparent and do not have vertically striped black sections.

The image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 can display, for example, a right eye image (R image) instead of a left eye image (L image), and the parallax barrier image described above is made non-display (fully transparent display) on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910, so that a planar image (2D image) can also be displayed.

In other words, the naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5', which is the display means of this modified example 006SG-7, can display a naked eye stereoscopic image composed of an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye in addition to a planar image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image.

The stereoscopic image consisting of a right-eye image and a left-eye image displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 is also drawn on each of the layers described above, just like the planar image (2D image), while the parallax barrier image displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is drawn on a dedicated layer provided exclusively for the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 and displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910.

When such a naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' is used to display a performance image, during variable display, other performances may be executed by displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) at a timing different from the specific performance (e.g., development suggestion performance) in the present invention.

As shown in Figures 16-45(A) to 16-45(D), during variable display, the naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' is capable of executing a specific effect in which the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R that are displaced upward and the image of the middle area 006SG005C that is displaced downward are displayed, as described above. In addition, a variable display preview effect is executed that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot as a preview effect whose execution period does not overlap with the development hint effect, and a stereoscopic image is displayed in the variable display preview effect.

In other words, when a development suggestion effect is executed, which is a specific effect in which the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R that are displaced specific images and move upward, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C that is moved downward, are displayed, only the planar image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, is displayed, and the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed.

When the image of the left region 006SG005L and right region 006SG005R moving upward as a displacement specific image, and the image of the middle region 006SG005C moving downward as an image are displayed, the display is made to be a planar image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, thereby making it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the displacement is due to a stereoscopic image, and thus preventing a decrease in the interest of the presentation.

In this embodiment, since the execution period of the performance in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed differs from that of the development suggestion performance, which is a specific performance in which displacement specific images, images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R moved upward, and an image of the middle area 006SG005C moved downward, are displayed, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) is restricted based on the execution period of the performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a displacement specific image and a stereoscopic image (3D image) are displayed during the same performance, data such as a display in progress flag that can identify that a displacement specific image is being displayed may be stored so that the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed while the displacement specific image is being displayed, and the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) may be restricted based on the data. In addition, regarding these restrictions, in order to prevent a stereoscopic image (3D image) from being displayed immediately after or immediately before the display of the displacement specific image has ended, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) may be restricted by storing data such as a display flag for a specified period before and after the period during which the displacement specific image is displayed.

In the above-mentioned modified example 006SG-7, a parallax barrier type naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' using the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and stereoscopic images (3D images) may be displayed using naked eye stereoscopic image display devices using a lenticular lens method or integral imaging method other than the parallax barrier method.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG0-7, a form in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed in the development suggestion performance has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a case in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed in the development suggestion performance may also be provided. In addition, if a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed in the development suggestion performance, the stereoscopic image (3D image) image (right eye image and left eye image) can be drawn and arranged in an image drawing area (for example, layer 1 image drawing area) that is higher than the image drawing area in which the planar image (2D image) is drawn and arranged. In this way, the stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed with priority over the planar image (2D image), so the stereoscopic image (3D image) can be displayed preferably in the development suggestion performance.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-7, a form in which a variable display preview effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot is executed in a period different from the development suggestion effect (specific effect) as an effect for displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed as an introduction effect for the development suggestion effect (specific effect) in a period prior to the development suggestion effect (specific effect). In this way, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) can make the player aware in advance that the development suggestion effect (specific effect) will be executed, thereby further improving the presentation effect of the development suggestion effect (specific effect). Furthermore, multiple presentation modes for the introduction effect and the development suggestion effect (specific effect) may be provided, and the presentation mode of the development suggestion effect (specific effect) may be different depending on which presentation mode the introduction effect is executed in.

In addition, the introduction performance may be performed by operating the movable body 32, and the effects of the introduction performance and the development suggestion performance (specific performance) may be improved by coordinating the movement of the movable body 32 with the display of a stereoscopic image (3D image).

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, an example of the present invention being applied to a pachinko gaming machine 1 is given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to a slot machine.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, as shown in FIG. 16-46 as modified example 006SG-8, the game-related information in the present invention (corresponding to the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J in the characteristic part 006SG) may display medal payout display, remaining number of games in the AT (assist time), medal display stored as credits, etc. together with the presentation image on the image display device 5, and these game-related information may be treated as non-target images for displacement.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each of the modified examples, an example is given of a form in which a special effect of the present invention is performed in which the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed or distorted (distorted), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special effect may be performed in which the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is repeatedly changed or distorted.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modified example, the development suggestion effect, reach suggestion effect, revival effect, look-ahead notice effect, promotion effect, temporary stop suggestion effect, and temporary stop notification effect are exemplified as specific effects in the present invention, but multiple effects may be executed as these specific effects. In addition, when multiple specific effects are executed in this way, for example, in the normal state, an effect in which the decorative pattern (characters and numbers) such as the development suggestion effect is not divided can be executed in the normal state, while an effect in which the decorative pattern (only numbers) is divided into multiple pieces or display areas such as the revival effect and look-ahead notice effect can be executed. In this way, in the normal state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the specific effect due to the decorative pattern including characters and numbers not being divided, and conversely, in the time-saving state, the effect of the specific effect can be improved by dividing the decorative pattern of only numbers.

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, an example was given of a form in which the decorative pattern is composed of characters and numbers in the normal state, and is composed of only numbers in the time-saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the decorative pattern may be changed midway through the variable display in a specific variable pattern, such as the variable display in the variable pattern of a super reach. For example, in the variable display of a super reach, a variable display of a decorative pattern composed of characters and numbers may be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach, and a variable display of a decorative pattern composed of only numbers may be executed during the period after the reach. Furthermore, during the period after the reach, it may be possible to execute an effect in which the decorative pattern is divided, such as a revival effect, as a specific effect in this invention.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modified example, an example is given of an image in which at least a part of the specific image in the present invention is displaced in the left-right direction or the up-down direction and displayed as a displaced specific image on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an image in which at least a part of the specific image is enlarged or reduced may be displayed as a displaced specific image on the image display device 5. In other words, the displacement direction of the image in the present invention may include the enlargement/reduction direction (Z-axis direction) in addition to the left-right direction (X-axis direction) and the up-down direction (Y-axis direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG, as shown in Figs. 16-3 and 16-4, a form of generating a displacement image by a replacement method in which pixel X corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image is identified from a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image according to the R value and G value of the pixel A, and the pixel X is displaced (replaced) to a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a displacement image may be generated by a method (movement method) in which pixel X at a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image in the displacement target image is moved to a position corresponding to the R value and G value of the pixel A. Note that, in the replacement method, as in modified example 006SG-3, it is necessary to edit the displacement image of the area close to the boundary into a displacement image that takes into account the width of the boundary of the area with different movement directions, whereas in the case of the replacement method, such editing is not necessary, so that the load of creating the image can be reduced, and in addition, when an effect image or the like is placed on the boundary, the degree of freedom of setting the boundary where the effect image is placed can be increased, so that the load of creating the image including the effect image can be reduced.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 103 CPU
120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player ,
a display means having a display area capable of displaying an image, the display area capable of displaying a display image of game-related information relating to the progress of a game;
a storage means capable of storing image data including at least a specific image to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means having a plurality of display layers on which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image for displaying each of the images arranged on the plurality of display layers in the display area;
a variable winning means capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can easily win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot or cannot hardly win a prize;
A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state;
a launching means capable of launching game media in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means for displaying a guidance message to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area out of the first area and the second area;
The display means is
A specific display corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed,
A display of an amount of the game value to be awarded can be displayed on the front side of the specific display,
A first notification display is displayed on the front side of the specific display when the amount of the game value awarded reaches a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display is displayed when the amount of the game value awarded reaches a second predetermined amount.
The notification display is a display that ends after a specific period of time has elapsed since the display was started,
The character display included in the notification display has a display size larger than that of the character display used to display the amount of the provided toner.
The character display included in the provision amount display and the notification display includes a specific character display in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the character display,
The specific character display used for the application amount display is not visible from the specific area,
The display means is
When the round of play is being played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the second state to the first state;
When the game medium does not win the variable prize-winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value has not been awarded can be displayed as the award amount display;
When the game medium wins the variable prize-winning means within the predetermined period, a count-up display corresponding to the award of the game value is performed at the start of the award amount display, and then a special display different from the predetermined display is displayed ;
the guidance display means is capable of displaying the guidance display in a first manner before the predetermined period has elapsed, and is capable of displaying the guidance display in a second manner having a different degree of emphasis from the first manner after the predetermined period has elapsed,
The image processing means is capable of generating the specific image on a specific display layer,
A display image of the game-related information is generated on a special display layer that is displayed in the display area with priority over the specific display layer.

Images